advertisement
LASERJET ENTERPRISE 700
Troubleshooting Manual
2
3
M712
HP LaserJet Enterprise 700 M712
Troubleshooting Manual
Copyright and License
© 2013 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Part number: CF235-90963
Edition 2, 01/2013
Trademark Credits
Adobe ® , Adobe Photoshop ® , Acrobat ® , and
PostScript ® are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
Apple and the Apple logo are trademarks of
Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries. iPod is a trademark of
Apple Computer, Inc. iPod is for legal or rightholder-authorized copying only. Don't steal music.
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® XP, and Windows Vista® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
UNIX ® is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.
Conventions used in this guide
TIP:
Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.
NOTE:
Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.
CAUTION:
Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the product.
WARNING!
Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury, catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.
ENWW iii
iv Conventions used in this guide ENWW
Table of contents
Motor locations ........................................................................... 7
Failure detection ......................................................................... 7
Fan locations .............................................................................. 9
Failure detection ......................................................................... 9
Over-current/over-voltage/overload protection ............................................ 11
Power supply voltage detection .................................................................. 11
Power supply illumination control ............................................................... 12
Step 1: primary charging ........................................................... 24
Step 2: laser-beam exposure ....................................................... 25
ENWW v
vi
Step 3: developing .................................................................... 25
Step 4: image transfer ............................................................... 26
Step 5: separation from the drum ................................................ 26
Step 6: fusing ........................................................................... 27
Step 7: drum cleaning ............................................................... 27
Cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection ....................... 35
Lift-up operation ........................................................................ 36
Lift-down operation .................................................................... 36
Cassette media-presence detection ............................................................. 37
MP tray media-presence detection .............................................................. 39
MP tray multiple-feed prevention ................................................................ 40
ENWW
ENWW
500-sheet paper feeder failure detection ..................................................... 51
500-sheet paper feeder cassette pickup ...................................................... 53
500-sheet paper feeder lift-up operation ..................................................... 54
500-sheet paper feeder cassette media-presence detection ............................ 55
500-sheet paper feeder cassette multiple-feed prevention .............................. 55
Paper deck cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection ....... 63
Paper deck cassette media-presence detection ............................................. 65
No pick jam 3 (3x500-sheet paper deck only) ............................................. 66
HCI cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection ................. 71
HCI cassette media-presence detection ....................................................... 72
vii
viii
Duplexer reverse and feed operation sequence ............................................ 79
Side misregistration failure detection ............................................ 82
Power-on troubleshooting overview .............................................. 99
Understand lights on the formatter ............................................. 101
Engine-test button .................................................................... 104
ENWW
ENWW
Cartridge door switch (SW3) .................................................... 110
Left door switch (SW1) ............................................................. 111
Right door sensor (SR8) ............................................................ 112
Cartridge install sensor (SR1) .................................................... 113
Top (top-of-page) sensor (SR9) .................................................. 114
Fuser loop sensor (SR6) ............................................................ 115
Fuser output sensor (SR12) ....................................................... 116
Duplex switchback sensor (SR1) ................................................ 117
Duplexer refeed sensor (SR2) .................................................... 118
Tray 4 feed sensor (SR1) .......................................................... 119
Output sensor (SR3) ................................................................. 120
Tray/bin manual sensor tests ................................................................... 121
Main product trays .................................................................. 123
Optional 500-sheet paper tray (Tray 4) ...................................... 131
1x500 and 3x500 paper deck trays ......................................... 136
HCI trays ................................................................................ 138
Control-panel tests ................................................................... 145
Half self-test ............................................................................ 145
Drum rotation test check ........................................................... 146
Component test (special-mode test) ............................................ 146
DC controller connections ......................................................... 153
Locations of major components ................................................................ 156
Set up an auto cleaning page ................................................... 174
Configuration page ................................................................. 175
HP embedded Jetdirect page .................................................... 176
Finding important information on the configuration pages ............ 177
Reports menu .......................................................................... 178
ix
x
General Settings menu ............................................................. 179
General Print Settings menu ...................................................... 185
Default Print Options menu ....................................................... 188
Display Settings menu .............................................................. 189
Manage Supplies menu ........................................................... 191
Manage Trays menu ................................................................ 192
Network Settings menu ............................................................ 194
Troubleshooting menu .............................................................. 208
Device Maintenance menu ...................................................................... 210
Backup/Restore menu .............................................................. 210
Calibration/Cleaning menu ...................................................... 211
USB Firmware Upgrade menu ................................................... 212
Service menu .......................................................................... 212
Control-panel message types ................................................................... 213
11.00.YY Internal clock error To continue, touch “OK” ................ 213
20.00.00 Insufficient memory: <Device> To continue, touch “OK” 213
21.00.00 Page too complex To continue, touch “OK” ................. 214
33.WX.YZ Used board/disk installed ........................................ 214
40.00.01 USB I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK” ........ 214
40.00.02 Embedded I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK” 214
40.00.03 EIO <X> buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK” ........ 214
40.00.04 EIO <X> bad transmission To continue, touch “OK” ..... 215
40.00.05 Embedded I/O bad transmission To continue, touch
“OK” ..................................................................................... 215
41.03.YZ Unexpected size in Tray <X> ..................................... 215
41.03.YZ Unexpected size in Tray <X> To use another tray, touch
"Options" ............................................................................... 216
41.05.YZ Unexpected type in Tray <X> ..................................... 216
41.WX.YZ Error To use another tray, touch "Options" ................. 218
47.FC.YZ Printer calibration failed To continue, touch “OK” ......... 220
47.WX.YZ Printer calibration failed ........................................... 221
49.XX.YY Error To continue turn off then on ................................ 221
50.WX.YZ Fuser error To continue turn off then on ...................... 221
51.00.YY Error To continue turn off then on ................................ 225
52.00.00 Error To continue turn off then on ............................... 225
52.00.20 Error To continue turn off then on ............................... 226
52.<XX>.00 Error To continue turn off then on ............................ 226
ENWW
ENWW
54.XX.YY Error ....................................................................... 226
55.XX.YY DC controller error To continue turn off then on ............ 227
56.00.YY Error To continue turn off then on ................................ 227
57.00.0X Error ....................................................................... 228
58.00.04 Error To continue turn off then on ............................... 228
59.00.00 Error To continue turn off then on ............................... 228
59.00.20 Error To continue turn off then on ............................... 229
59.00.30 Error To continue turn off then on ............................... 229
59.00.40 Error To continue turn off then on ............................... 229
59.05.50 Error To continue turn off then on ............................... 229
59.05.60 Error To continue turn off then on ............................... 230
60.00.0Y Tray <Y> lifting error ................................................ 230
62.00.00 No system To continue turn off then on ........................ 230
69.11.YY Error To continue, touch “OK” .................................... 231
70.00.00 Error To continue turn off then on ............................... 231
81.WX.YZ Embedded JetDirect Error To continue turn off then on . . 231
81.YY.YY EIO Error To continue turn off then on ......................... 232
98.00.0X Corrupt data in X volume ........................................... 232
<Binname> full Remove all paper from bin ................................. 232
Bad optional tray connection .................................................... 233
Black Cartridge low ................................................................. 233
Black Cartridge very low .......................................................... 233
Black Cartridge very low To continue, touch “OK” ...................... 233
Card slot device failure To clear touch “Clear” ........................... 234
Card slot file operation failed To clear touch “Clear” ................... 234
Card slot file system is full To clear touch “Clear” ........................ 234
Card slot is write protected To clear touch “Clear” ...................... 234
Card slot not initialized To clear touch “Clear” ........................... 234
Cartridge ship mode ................................................................ 235
Chosen personality not available To continue, touch “OK” ........... 235
Cleaning disk <X>% complete Do not power off ......................... 235
Close left door ........................................................................ 235
Close top cover ....................................................................... 236
Data received ......................................................................... 236
Disk full Delete stored jobs ........................................................ 236
Disk low Delete stored jobs ....................................................... 236
EIO <X> disk not functional ...................................................... 237
EIO <X> disk spinning up ......................................................... 237
EIO device failure To clear touch “Clear” ................................... 237
EIO file operation failed To clear touch “Clear” .......................... 237
EIO file system is full To clear touch “Clear” ............................... 237
xi
xii
EIO is write protected To clear touch “Clear” .............................. 238
EIO not initialized To clear touch “Clear” ................................... 238
Event log is empty ................................................................... 238
Fuser Kit Low .......................................................................... 238
Fuser Kit very low .................................................................... 238
Fuser Kit very low To continue, touch “OK” ................................ 239
Incompatible <supply> ............................................................. 239
Incompatible supplies .............................................................. 239
Initializing... ........................................................................... 240
Install Black Cartridge .............................................................. 240
Install Fuser Unit ...................................................................... 240
Install supplies ........................................................................ 240
Internal disk device failure To clear touch “Clear” ....................... 240
Internal disk file operation failed To clear touch “Clear” ............... 241
Internal disk file system is full To clear touch “Clear” .................... 241
Internal disk is write protected To clear touch “Clear” .................. 241
Internal disk not found ............................................................. 241
Internal disk not functional ........................................................ 241
Internal disk not initialized To clear touch “Clear” ....................... 242
Internal disk spinning up .......................................................... 242
Load Tray 1 [Type] [Size] ......................................................... 242
Load Tray 1 [Type] [Size] To continue, touch “OK” ...................... 242
Load Tray <X>: [Size] .............................................................. 242
Load Tray <X>: [Size] To continue, touch “OK” .......................... 243
Load Tray <X>: [Size] To use another tray, touch "Options" ......... 243
Load Tray <X>: [Type], [Size] ................................................... 243
Load Tray <X>: [Type], [Size] To use another tray, touch
"Options" ............................................................................... 244
Manually feed output stack Then touch "OK" to print second sides 244
Manually feed: [Size] .............................................................. 245
Manually feed: [Size] To continue, touch “OK” ........................... 245
Manually feed: [Size] To use another tray, touch "Options" .......... 245
Manually feed: [Type], [Size] To continue, touch “OK” ................ 246
Manually feed: [Type], [Size] To use another tray, touch
"Options" ............................................................................... 246
No job to cancel ..................................................................... 246
Output Bin full ......................................................................... 246
Paperless mode ....................................................................... 247
Printing Engine Test... .............................................................. 247
Printing stopped To continue, touch “OK” ................................... 247
RAM Disk device failure To clear touch “Clear” .......................... 247
ENWW
ENWW
RAM Disk file operation failed To clear touch “Clear” .................. 247
RAM Disk file system is full To clear touch “Clear” ....................... 248
RAM Disk is write protected To clear touch “Clear” ..................... 248
RAM Disk not initialized To clear touch “Clear” .......................... 248
Remove cartridge lock ............................................................. 248
Remove the toner cartridge ....................................................... 248
Replace Black Cartridge ........................................................... 249
Replace Fuser Kit ..................................................................... 249
Replace supplies ..................................................................... 249
ROM disk device failed To clear touch “Clear” ........................... 250
ROM disk file operation failed To clear touch “Clear” .................. 250
ROM disk file system is full To clear touch “Clear” ....................... 250
ROM disk is write protected To clear touch “Clear” ..................... 250
ROM disk not initialized To clear touch “Clear” .......................... 250
Size mismatch in Tray <X> ....................................................... 251
Standard bin full Remove all paper from bin ............................... 251
Supplies low ........................................................................... 251
Supplies very low To continue, touch “OK” ................................. 251
Supply memory warning .......................................................... 252
Tray <X> empty: [Size] ............................................................ 252
Tray <X> empty: [Type], [Size] ................................................. 252
Tray <X> open ........................................................................ 252
Tray <X> overfilled Remove excess paper .................................. 253
Tray <X> overfilled To use another tray, touch "Options" ............. 253
Type mismatch Tray <X> .......................................................... 253
Unable to cancel firmware update job ....................................... 254
Unable to install the firmware ................................................... 254
Unsupported drive installed ...................................................... 254
Unsupported supply in use ........................................................ 254
Unsupported supply installed .................................................... 255
Unsupported supply installed To continue, touch “OK” ................. 255
Unsupported tray configuration ................................................. 255
Unsupported USB accessory detected Remove USB accessory ....... 255
Upgrade complete To continue turn off then on ........................... 256
USB accessory not functional .................................................... 256
USB is write protected To clear touch “Clear” ............................. 256
USB not initialized To clear touch “Clear” .................................. 257
xiii
xiv
USB storage accessory removed Clearing any associated data ..... 257
USB storage device failure To clear touch “Clear” ....................... 257
USB storage file operation failed To clear touch “Clear” .............. 257
USB storage file system is full To clear touch “Clear” ................... 257
Used supply in use .................................................................. 257
Used supply installed To continue, touch “OK” ............................ 258
The product has a poor physical connection. ............................................. 291
The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product ...................... 291
The computer is unable to communicate with the product ............................ 292
The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network .......... 292
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems ................ 292
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly .............................. 292
ENWW
The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect .................... 292
Active and repository firmware locations ................................................... 296
Execute a 3 Partial Clean ......................................................... 297
Execute a 2 Format Disk ........................................................... 298
Embedded Web Server ........................................................................... 299
USB storage device (Preboot menu) .......................................................... 300
USB storage device (control-panel menu) ................................................... 302
ENWW xv
xvi
United States and Puerto Rico .................................................................. 322
Multiple returns (more than one cartridge) .................................. 322
Single returns .......................................................................... 322
Shipping ................................................................................ 322
ENWW
List of tables
ENWW xvii
xviii ENWW
ENWW xix
xx ENWW
List of figures
ENWW xxi
xxii ENWW
ENWW xxiii
xxiv ENWW
1 Theory of operation
●
●
●
●
●
Pickup, feed, and delivery system
●
500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 4)
●
1x500 and 3x500 paper feeder and stand
●
3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder
●
ENWW 1
Basic operation
Function structure
The product contains the following systems:
●
Engine control system
●
Laser scanner system
●
Image-formation system
●
Pickup, feed and delivery system
●
Accessory
Figure 1-1
Function structure
Laser scanner system
Image-formation system
Engine control system
Pickup, feed and delivery system
Accessory
Operation sequence
The DC controller in the engine-control system controls the operational sequences. The following table describes durations and operations for each period of a print operation from when the product is turned on until the motors stop rotating.
2 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Table 1-1 Operation sequence
Period
WAIT period
Duration Purpose
From the time the power switch is turned on, the door is closed or product exits Sleep mode until the product is ready for a print operation.
Brings the product to the Ready state.
●
Detects the failure of the low-voltage power supply
●
Detects the connection with the accessories
●
Detects the presence of cartridge
STBY (Standby period)
INTR (Initial rotation)
LSTR (Last rotation)
From the end of WAIT or LSTR period until either a print command is sent or the power switch is turned off.
From the time the print command is received until the product picks up the paper.
From the end of the INTR period until the last sheet is delivered.
From the end of the PRINT period until the motor stops rotating.
●
Rotates and then stops each motor and fan
●
Checks the fuser temperature
●
Heats the fuser film
●
Detects any residual paper and clears it automatically
●
Initializes the high-voltage bias
●
Cleans the photosensitive drum
●
Detects the toner level
Maintains the product in printable condition.
●
Enters Sleep mode if the sleep command is received
●
Rotates and then stops each fan
Prepares the product for a print job.
●
Rotate the motors
●
Rotate the fans
●
Outputs the high-voltage bias
●
Starts up the laser scanner assembly
●
Warms up the fuser heater
Processes the print job.
●
Forms the image on the photosensitive drum
●
Transfers toner to the paper
●
Fuses the toner image onto the paper
Stops each load.
●
Stops the motors and fans
●
Stops the high-voltage bias
●
Stops the laser scanner assembly
●
Stops the fuser heater
The product enters the INTR period as the LSTR period is complete if the formatter sends another print command.
Basic operation 3
Engine control system
The engine-control system coordinates all the other systems, according to commands from the formatter.
The engine-control system contains the following components:
●
DC controller PCA
●
Low-voltage power supply unit
●
High-voltage power supply PCA
●
Fuser control
Figure 1-2
Engine control system
Engine control system
Laser scanner system
DC controller
Image-formation system
Low-voltage power supply
Formatter
High-voltage power supply
Pickup, feed and delivery system
Fuser control
Accessory
4 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
DC controller PCA
The DC controller PCA controls the product operation sequence.
Figure 1-3
DC controller PCA
AC input
Low-voltage power supply
Fuser
Transfer roller
Cartridge
Control panel
High-voltage power supply
DC controller
USB PCA
Connector PCA
Input source accessory
HIP
Laser scanner
Formatter
The following table lists the product electrical components.
Component type
Switch
Component abbreviation
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
—
Component name
Left door interlock switch
Cartridge door interlock switch
Cartridge door open detection switch
Upper cassette media width switch
Lower cassette media width switch
Upper cassette media end switch
Lower cassette media end switch
Power switch
LED
Motor
Fan
Solenoid
Clutch
Photointerrupter
Sensor
Switch
Duplex unit
(Accessory)
ENWW Engine control system 5
Component type
Solenoid
Clutch
Fan
Photointerrupter
Sensor
Motor
SR12
—
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
SR8
SR9
SR10
SR11
SR4
SR5
SR6
SR7
Component abbreviation
SL1
FM3
SR1
SR2
SR3
CL1
CL2
FM1
FM2
Component name
Tray 1 (MP tray) pickup solenoid
Upper cassette pickup clutch
Lower cassette pickup clutch
Rear fan
Front fan
Fuser fan
Cartridge presence sensor
MP tray media out sensor
Output sensor
Output bin media full sensor
Lower cassette media out sensor
Loop sensor
Upper cassette media out sensor
Right door sensor
TOP sensor
Upper cassette lift-up sensor
Lower cassette lift-up sensor
Fuser output sensor
Environment sensor
Drum motor
Scanner motor
Fuser motor
Upper cassette lifter motor
Lower cassette lifter motor
Motor control
The product has five motors for the paper-feed and image-formation.
6 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Motor locations
The following figure shows the product motor locations.
Figure 1-4
Motor locations
M2
M4
M5
M3
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
Table 1-2 Motor locations
Motor
M1
Components driven by motor
Drum motor Photosensitive drum, transfer roller, registration roller, MP tray pickup roller, cassette pickup roller, and feed roller
Scanner motor
Fuser motor
Laser scanner mirror
Pressure roller, fuser output roller, intermediate output roller and paper delivery roller
Upper cassette lifter motor Lifter for the upper cassette
Lower cassette lifter motor Lifter for the lower cassette
Failure detection
The DC controller monitors the following motors to determine a motor failure:
●
Drum motor
●
Scanner motor
●
Fuser motor
ENWW Engine control system 7
The DC controller determines if the motor has failed and notifies the formatter when the motor encounters the following conditions:
●
Startup failure — The motor does not reach a specified rotational count within a specified time from when the motor starts.
●
Rotational failure — The rotational speed of the motor is not in the specified range for a specified time after the motor reaches a specified speed.
The DC controller notifies the formatter of a BD (beam detect) failure when it detects a rotational failure of the scanner motor.
The DC controller monitors the related part condition of the following motors to determine a motor failure:
●
Upper cassette lifter motor
●
Lower cassette lifter motor
Fan control
The product has three fans for preventing the temperature from rising in the product and cooling down the delivered paper.
8 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Fan locations
The following figure shows the product fan locations.
Figure 1-5
Fan locations
FM1
FM3
FM2
Table 1-3 Fan locations
Fan Cooling area
FM1
FM2
FM3
Rear fan
Front fan
Fuser fan
Product inside and low-voltage power supply area
Product inside
Fuser area
Type
Exhaust
Intake
Intake
Speed
Full/Mid/Low
Full
Full
Failure detection
The DC controller determines if the fan has failed and notifies the formatter when the fan stops rotating for a specified time during start-up.
ENWW Engine control system 9
Low-voltage power-supply PCA
The low-voltage power supply converts AC power into the DC voltage that product components use.
Figure 1-6
Low-voltage power-supply PCA
AC input
Low-voltage power supply
Power fuse
FU1
High-voltage power supply
High-voltage circuit
Fuser circuit
DC controller
+24VD
Interlock switch
SW2
Power fuse
FU2
Zerocross detection circuit
/ZEROX
Rectifying circuit
Power fuse
FU3
Power switch
+3.3VA
+3.3V
generation circuit
Protection circuit
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VC
+3.3VD
+5V
+24VC
10
+24V generation circuit
+5V generation circuit
/PSTYP100
+24VC
+24VB
RMT_24V
RMT_PFC
+24VB
Interlock switch
SW1
Formatter
+3.3VA
+3.3VB
+5V
Connector PCA
+3.3VA
+3.3VB
The following table shows the specifications for the DC power supply.
Table 1-4 Low voltage power supply DC power specifications
DC voltage Behavior
+24V +24VB
+24VC
+24VD
Off during Sleep mode (sleep level1, active off and inactive off)
Off during Sleep mode (sleep level1, active off and inactive off) Interrupted when the left door open
Off during Sleep mode (sleep level1, active off and inactive off) Interrupted when the left door or the cartridge door open
Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Table 1-4 Low voltage power supply DC power specifications (continued)
DC voltage Behavior
+5V
+3.3V
+5V
+3.3VA
+3.3VB
+3.3VC
+3.3VD
Off during Sleep mode (sleep level1, active off and inactive off)
Constantly supplied
Off during Sleep mode (inactive off)
Off during Sleep mode (active off and inactive off)
Off during Sleep mode (sleep level1, active off and inactive off)
Over-current/over-voltage/overload protection
The over-current/overvoltage protection automatically stops the DC voltage to the product components whenever an excessive current or abnormal voltage is detected. The overload protection automatically stops the DC voltage to the product components whenever the temperature of the low-voltage power supply PCA rises to specified degrees.
The low-voltage power supply has a protective circuit against over-current, over-voltage and overload to prevent failures in the power supply circuit. If DC voltage is not being supplied from the low-voltage power supply, the protective function might be running. In this case, turn the power off and unplug the power cord. Do not turn the product switch on until the root cause is found and corrected.
The DC controller determines a low-voltage power supply failure and notifies the formatter when the protective function runs.
In addition, the low-voltage power supply has three fuses to protect against over-current. If over-current flows into the AC line, the fuse blows to stop AC power.
Safety interruption
For user and service technician's safety, the product interrupts the power supply of +24V by turning off the interlock switch. The DC power to the following components is interrupted:
●
High-voltage power supply
●
Fuser motor
The remote switch control circuit turns on or off the product so that the AC power flows even the power switch is turned off. Be sure to unplug the power cord before disassembling the product.
Power supply voltage detection
The power supply voltage detection controls the fuser properly according to the voltage. The DC controller detects whether the low-voltage power supply voltage is 100V or 220V according to the
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE signal (/PSTYP100).
ENWW Engine control system 11
Sleep mode
The Sleep mode reduces the power consumption of the product. There are three types of sleep mode:
●
Sleep level 1
The DC controller stops the power supply of +24V according to the +24V CONTROL signal
(RMT_24V) and POWER FACTOR CORRECTION ACTIVATE signal (RMT_PFC) after a specified period of time from when a sleep command signal is sent from the formatter. The DC controller supplies +24V and the product exits sleep level 1 when a recover signal is sent from the formatter.
●
Active off
The DC controller stops the power supplies except for +3.3VA and +3.3VB to the formatter when an active off command signal is sent from the formatter during sleep level 1 or STBY period. The
DC controller supplies all power supplies and the product exits active off when a recover signal is sent from the formatter or the power switch is depressed for shorter than three seconds.
●
Inactive off
The DC controller stops the power supplies except for +3.3VA to the formatter when an inactive off command signal is sent from the formatter during sleep level 1 or STBY period. The product enters inactive off when the power switch is depressed for longer than three seconds. The DC controller supplies all power supplies and the product exits inactive off when a recover signal is sent from the formatter or the power switch is depressed for shorter than three seconds.
Power supply illumination control
The DC controller changes the light of the LED (power supply illumination) for the power switch according to the power supply condition as follows:
●
Lighting-up: STBY period or sleep level 1
●
Blinking: Active off
●
Lighting-out: Inactive off
12 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
High-voltage power-supply PCA
The high-voltage power supply applies positive or negative voltage biases to the following components:
●
Primary charging roller
●
Developing roller
●
Transfer roller
●
Static charge eliminator
●
Fuser film
Figure 1-7
High-voltage power-supply PCA
Fuser
Fuser film
Pressure roller
DC controller High-voltage power supply
Primary charging bias circuit
Cartridge
To primary charge roller
To developing roller
Developing bias circuit
Photosensitive drum
Transfer roller
Static charge eliminator
Static charge eliminatior bias circuit
Transfer bias circuit
ENWW
The DC controller controls the high-voltage power supply to generate the following biases.
●
Primary charging bias
The primary charging bias is used to charge the surface of the photosensitive drum evenly to prepare for image formation. The primary charging bias circuit generates the bias.
●
Developing bias
The developing bias is used to adhere toner to an electrostatic latent image formed on the photosensitive drum. The developing bias circuit generates the bias.
●
Transfer bias
The transfer bias is used to transfer the toner from the photosensitive drum onto the paper. The transfer bias circuit generates the bias. The transfer bias circuit also generates the reverse bias to clean the transfer roller.
Engine control system 13
●
Static charge eliminator bias
The static charge eliminator bias is used to improve the paper-feed performance and imagequality. The static charge eliminator bias circuit generates the bias.
●
Fusing bias
The fusing bias is used to improve the image-quality. The primary charging bias circuit generates the bias.
14 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Fuser control
The fuser heater control circuit and the fuser heater safety circuit control the fuser temperature according to commands from the DC controller. The product uses an on-demand fusing method.
Figure 1-8
Fuser components
TH4
H1/H2
Fuser film
TH1
TP1
TH2
Pressure roller
TH3
FUSER TEMPERATURE signal
FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal
Fuser heater control circuit
Fuser heater safety circuit
High-voltage power supply
ENWW
DC controller
The following table shows the function of each fuser component.
Component
H1
H2
TP1
TH1
Fuser main heater
Fuser sub heater
Thermoswitch
Main thermistor
Function
Heats center area of the fuser film
Heats both ends of the fuser film
Prevents an abnormal temperature rise of the fuser heater (contact type)
Detects the temperature at center of the fuser heater (contact type)
Engine control system 15
Component
TH2
TH3
TH4
Sub thermistor 1
Sub thermistor 2
Sub thermistor 3
Figure 1-9
Fuser control system
AC input
Function
Detects the temperature at ends of the fuser heater (contact type)
RL1001
RL1002
Low-voltage power supply
Zerocross detection circuit
High-voltage power supply
/ZEROX
DC controller
RLD
Relay drive circuit
Fuser heater control circuit
Fuser heater safety circuit
FSRD1
FSRD2
Current detection circuit
Fuser control circuit
FSRCUR
MFSRTH
S1FSRTH
S2FSRTH
S3FSRTH
Fuser
Fuser film assembly
TP1
TH2
TH3
H1/H2
TH1
TH4
Pressure roller
16 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Fuser temperature control
The fuser temperature control maintains the temperature of the fuser heater at its targeted temperature.
The DC controller monitors the FUSER TEMPERATURE signals (MFSRTH, S1FSRTH, S2FSRTH and
S3FSRTH) and sends the FUSER HEATER CONTROL signals (FSRD1 and FSRD2). The fuser heater control circuit controls the fuser heater depending on the signals so that the fuser heater remains at the targeted temperature.
Fuser heater protective function
The fuser heater protective function detects an abnormal temperature rise of the fuser and interrupts power supply to the fuser heater. The following protective components prevent an abnormal temperature rise of the fuser heater:
●
DC controller
The DC controller monitors the detected temperature of the thermistor. The DC controller releases the relay (RL1001) to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when it detects an abnormal temperature.
●
Fuser heater safety circuit
The fuser heater safety circuit monitors the detected temperature of the thermistor. The fuser heater safety circuit releases the relays (RL1001 and RL1002) or deactivates the fuser heater control circuit to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when it detects an abnormal temperature.
●
Thermoswitch
The contact of the thermoswitch is broken to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when the temperature of the fuser heater is abnormally high.
●
Current detection circuit
The current detection circuit monitors the current value flowing in the fuser heater control circuit, and it releases the relay to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when it detects an abnormal current flow.
The DC controller deactivates the FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal and releases the relays
(RL1001 and RL1002) to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when it detects out of a specified current value of the CURRENT DETECTION signal (FSRCUR).
ENWW Engine control system 17
Fuser failure detection
The DC controller determines if the fuser functions properly. The DC controller determines a fuser failure, interrupts power supply to the fuser heater and notifies the formatter of a failure state when it encounters the following conditions:
●
Abnormally high temperature 1
The main thermistor detects 240°C (464°F) or higher for a specified period.
●
Abnormally high temperature 2
The sub thermistor 1 detects 230°C (446°F) or higher for a specified period during WAIT period.
The sub thermistor 1 detects 230°C (446°F) or higher for a specified period before INTR starts.
The sub thermistor 1 detects 300°C (572°F) or higher for a specified period.
●
Abnormally high temperature 3
Either one of the sub thermistor 2 or sub thermistor 3 detects 230°C (446°F) or higher for a specified period during WAIT period.
Either one of the sub thermistor 2 or sub thermistor 3 detects 230°C (446°F) or higher for a specified period before INTR starts.
Either one of the sub thermistor 2 or sub thermistor 3 detects 300°C (572°F) or higher for a specified period.
●
Abnormally low temperature 1
The main thermistor detects 60°C (140°F) or lower for a specified period during WAIT period.
The main thermistor detects 70°C (158°F) or lower for a specified period during heater temperature control of INTR period.
The main thermistor detects the targeted temperature minus 40°C (104°F) or lower for a specified period during heater temperature control or pressure roller cleaning of PRINT period.
The main thermistor detects 80°C (176°F) or lower for a specified period during heater temperature control or pressure roller cleaning of PRINT period.
●
Abnormally low temperature 2
The sub thermistor 1 detects 60°C (140°F) or lower for a specified period during WAIT period.
●
Abnormally low temperature 3
Either one of the sub thermistor 2 or sub thermistor 3 detects 60°C (140°F) or lower for a specified period during WAIT period.
●
Abnormal temperature rise
The main thermistor detects the targeted temperature minus 10°C (50°F) or lower for a specified period during heater temperature control of INTR period.
●
Drive circuit failure
18 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
The frequency of the ZEROCROSS signal is not detected in a specified value within a specified period after power-on.
The frequency of the ZEROCROSS signal is not detected in a specified value for a specified period after power-on and once the signal is detected.
●
Heater failure
A specified current value or lower is detected during the heater drive period of the WAIT period or when more than a specified electrical power is input.
Pressure roller cleaning
The pressure roller cleaning clears toner on the pressure roller surface by adhering to the paper according to a command from the formatter. This is executed only when the paper size is A4-R (rotated) or Letter-R (rotated). The operational sequence of the pressure roller cleaning is as follows:
1.
The DC controller picks up the paper from the designated input source when a cleaning command is sent from the formatter.
2.
When the trailing edge of paper passes through the transfer roller, the fuser motor repeats to rotate-and-stop at regular intervals and the fuser heater turns on-and-off at the same time.
3.
The toner on the pressure roller fuses onto the paper and the roller clears.
4.
The paper with fused toner is delivered out of the product.
ENWW Engine control system 19
Laser scanner system
The DC controller controls the laser scanner system according to commands from the formatter. The DC controller controls the internal components in the laser scanner system to form latent electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum according to the VIDEO signals. The following are the main components of the laser scanner system:
●
Laser assembly
●
Scanner motor assembly
●
BD (beam detect) sensor
●
Scanner mirror
Figure 1-10
Laser scanner system
DC controller
Laser assembly
Scanner mirror
BD sensor
Scanner motor assembly
Photosensitive drum
20 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Laser scanner failure detection
The DC controller determines a laser scanner failure and notifies the formatter of the error state when any of the following conditions occurs:
●
BD failure
A specified BD interval is not detected within a specified period during the scanner motor drive.
●
Scanner motor start-up failure
The scanner motor does not reach a specified rotation within a specified period from when the laser scanner starts driving.
●
Laser failure
A specified laser intensity is not detected.
Laser scanner safety function
The laser scanner has a mechanical shutter. For user and service technician safety, the laser shutter interrupts optical path of the laser scanner when the cartridge door is open.
ENWW Laser scanner system 21
Image-formation system
The DC controller controls the image-formation system according to commands from the formatter. The
DC controller controls the internal components of the image-formation system to form the toner image on the photosensitive drum surface. The toner image is transferred to the paper and fused.
The following are the main components of the image-formation system:
●
Cartridge
●
Transfer roller
●
Fuser
●
Laser scanner
●
High-voltage power supply
Figure 1-11
Image-formation system
Laser scanner
Cartridge
Fuser
Transfer roller
High-voltage power supply
DC controller
The DC controller rotates the drum motor to drive the following components:
●
Photosensitive drum
●
Developing roller (follows the photosensitive drum)
●
Primary charging roller (follows the photosensitive drum)
●
Transfer roller
The DC controller rotates the fuser motor to drive the following components:
●
Pressure roller
●
Fuser film (follows the pressure roller)
22 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Figure 1-12
Image-formation components
Cartridge
Photosensitive drum
Fuser motor
Fuser film
Primary charging roller
Developing roller
Transfer roller
Pressure roller
Fuser
DC controller
Drum motor
Image-formation process
The image-formation process consists of seven steps divided into five functional blocks:
●
Latent-image-formation system
◦
Step 1: Primary charging
◦
Step 2: Laser-beam exposure
●
Developing system
◦
Step 3: Developing
●
Transfer system
◦
Step 4: Transfer
◦
Step 5: Separation
ENWW
Image-formation system
23
●
Fuser system
◦
Step 6: Fusing
●
Drum cleaning
◦
Step 7: Drum cleaning
Figure 1-13
Image-formation process
: Paper path
: Direction of the drum rotation
: Functional block
: Step
Latent image formation
2. Laser-beam exposure
1. Primary charging
3. Developing
7. Drum cleaning
Developing
Delivery 6. Fusing
Fusing
5. Separation 4. Transfer
Transfer
Pickup
Latent-image formation block
During the two steps that comprise this block, an invisible latent image is formed on the photosensitive drum.
Step 1: primary charging
To prepare for latent image formation, the surface of the photosensitive drum is charged with a uniform negative potential. The primary charging roller charges the photosensitive drum directly. The primary charging bias is applied to the primary charging roller to keep a negative potential on the drum surface.
Figure 1-14
Primary charging
Primary charging roller
Primary charging bias
Photosensitive drum
24 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Step 2: laser-beam exposure
The laser-beam strikes the surface of the photosensitive drum to neutralize the negative charge. An electrostatic latent image forms where the negative charge was neutralized.
Figure 1-15
Laser-beam exposure
Laser beam
Photosensitive drum
Development block
Toner adheres to the electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum, which becomes visible.
Step 3: developing
Toner acquires a negative charge from the friction that occurs when the developing roller rotates against the developer blade. The developing bias is applied to the developing roller to make difference in the electric potential of the drum. The negatively charged toner is attracted to the latent image on the photosensitive drum because the drum surface has a higher potential. The latent image becomes visible on the drum.
Figure 1-16
Developing
Developing roller
Developer blade
Developing bias
Photosensitive drum
ENWW Image-formation system 25
Transfer block
During the two steps that comprise this block, a toner image on the photosensitive drum transfers to the paper.
Step 4: image transfer
The toner on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the paper. The transfer bias is applied to the transfer roller to charge the paper positive. The negatively charged toner on the drum surface transfers onto the paper.
Figure 1-17
Image transfer
Photosensitive drum
Paper
Transfer roller
Transfer bias
Step 5: separation from the drum
The elasticity of the paper and the curvature of the photosensitive drum cause the paper to separate from the photosensitive drum. The static charge eliminator bias is applied to the static charge eliminator. The static charge eliminator reduces back side static discharge of the paper after the transfer process for stable paper-feed and print-quality.
Figure 1-18
Separation from the drum
Photosensitive drum
Static charge eliminator
Static charge eliminator bias
Transfer roller
Paper
26 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Fuser block
Until the fusing stage is complete, the image is not permanently affixed to the paper. The toner can be easily smudged until the heat and pressure of the fusing process fix the image to the sheet.
Step 6: fusing
The toner melts by the heat and pressure as the paper passes through the rollers. The toner image is permanently fused to the paper. The fusing bias is applied to the fuser film to improve print-quality.
Figure 1-19
Fusing
Fuser heater
Fuser film
Toner
Paper
Fusing bias
Pressure roller
Drum-cleaning block
The residual toner is removed from the photosensitive drum surface
Step 7: drum cleaning
The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off the surface of the photosensitive drum and toner is deposited in the toner collection box.
Figure 1-20
Drum cleaning
Cleaning blade
Toner collection box
Photosensitive drum
Toner cartridge
The cartridge is filled with toner and consists of the following components:
●
Photosensitive drum
●
Developing roller
ENWW Image-formation system 27
●
Primary charging roller
●
Memory tag
Figure 1-21
Toner cartridge components
DC controller
High-voltage power supply
Drum motor
Cartridge
Memory Tag
Primary charging roller
Developing roller
Photosensitive drum
The cartridge serves a role in the following functions:
●
Memory tag
The memory tag is a non-volatile memory in the cartridge and the DC controller controls it. The memory tag stores information about usage for the cartridge and the DC controller reads and writes the data in the memory tag. The DC controller determines an memory tag error and notifies the formatter when it fails to either read from or write to the memory tag.
●
Cartridge-presence detection
The DC controller detects whether the cartridge is installed in the product by monitoring the cartridge presence sensor. The DC controller notifies the formatter when it determines a cartridge absence.
●
Toner-level detection
28 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
The DC controller detects the remaining toner level in a cartridge according to the TONER LEVEL signal. The DC controller determines a cartridge low warning or cartridge end of life when the toner level drops below a specified level and notifies the formatter.
●
Cartridge-life detection
The DC controller detects the cartridge life of components that wear out. The DC controller determines a cartridge end of life and notifies the formatter.
Other image-formation functions
Drum discharge
The drum discharge is a feature to remove residual charge on the photosensitive drum surface for preventing the uneven image density. The laser-beam strikes the surface of the photosensitive drum to remove the residual charge.
The drum discharge is performed during LSTR period.
Figure 1-22
Drum discharge
Laser beam
Photosensitive drum
Transfer roller cleaning
The transfer roller cleaning is a feature to remove residual toner on the transfer roller surface for preventing the back side toner stain of the paper.
The residual toner reverse transfers to the photosensitive drum by applying the reverse transfer bias to the transfer roller. The residual toner is deposited in the toner collection box.
ENWW Image-formation system 29
The transfer roller cleaning is performed during WAIT period, INTR period, LSTR period and after forming the image for the front side of page when duplex printing.
Figure 1-23
Transfer roller cleaning
Cleaning blade
Toner collection box
Photosensitive drum
Transfer roller
Reverse transfer bias
Environment change control
The environment change control calibrates each high-voltage bias to obtain an appropriate image according to the environment changes.
The DC controller determines the environment, where the product is installed, based on the surrounding temperature and humidity data from the environment sensor. It adjusts the high-voltage biases to accommodate environmental changes.
The DC controller determines an environment sensor abnormality and notifies the formatter when it detects out of specified range data from the environment sensor.
30 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Pickup, feed, and delivery system
The DC controller controls the pickup, feed and delivery system according to commands from the formatter. The DC controller controls each block to pickup, feed and deliver the paper. The pickup, feed and delivery system consists of following three functional blocks:
●
Pickup-and-feed block
●
Fuse-and-delivery block
●
Duplex block
Figure 1-24
Pickup, feed, and delivery system
Fuse-and-delivery block
Pickup-and-feed block
DC controller
Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path
The figure below shows the sensors and switches for the pickup, feed and delivery system.
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 31
Figure 1-25
Pickup, feed, and delivery system sensors and switches
SR4
SW1
SR3
SW3
SW2
SW8
SR12
SR2
SR6
PS1
SR9
SR8
SR7
SW6 SW4
SR10
SW7 SW5
SR11
SR5
Table 1-5 Pickup, feed, and delivery system sensors and switches
Component Signal
SR7
SR8
SR9
SR10
SR3
SR4
SR5
SR6
SR11
SR12
SW5
SW6
SW7
SR2
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
Left door interlock switch
Cartridge door interlock switch
Cartridge door open detection switch
Upper cassette media width switch
Lower cassette media width switch
Upper cassette media end switch
Lower cassette media end switch
MP tray media out sensor
Output sensor
Output bin media full sensor
Lower cassette media out sensor
Loop sensor
Upper cassette media out sensor
Right door sensor
TOP sensor
Upper cassette lift-up sensor
Lower cassette lift-up sensor
Fuser output sensor
LEFT DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal
CARTRIDGE DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal
CARTRIDGE DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal
UPPER CASSETTE MEDIA WIDTH signal
LOWER CASSETTE MEDIA WIDTH signal
UPPER CASSETTE MEDIA END signal
LOWER CASSETTE MEDIA END signal
MP TRAY MEDIA OUT signal
OUTPUT signal
OUTPUT BIN MEDIA FULL signal
LOWER CASSETTE MEDIA OUT signal
LOOP LEVEL signal
UPPER CASSETTE MEDIA OUT signal
RIGHT DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal
TOP signal
UPPER CASSETTE LIFT-UP signal
LOWER CASSETTE LIFT-UP signal
FUSER OUTPUT signal
The figure below shows the solenoid and motors for the pickup, feed and delivery system.
32 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Figure 1-26
Pickup, feed, and delivery-system solenoid and motors
M1
SL1
M3
CL1
CL2
M4
M5
Table 1-6 Pickup, feed, and delivery system solenoid and motors
Component Signal
M1
M3
M4
M5
SL1
CL1
CL2
MP tray pickup solenoid
Upper cassette pickup clutch
Lower cassette pickup clutch
Drum motor
Fuser motor
Upper cassette lifter motor
Lower cassette lifter motor
MP TRAY PICKUP SOLENOID signal
UPPER CASSETTE PICKUP CLUTCH signal
LOWER CASSETTE PICKUP CLUTCH signal
DRUM MOTOR CONTROL signal
FUSER MOTOR CONTROL signal
UPPER CASSETTE LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL signal
LOWER CASSETTE LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL signal
Pickup, feed, and delivery system 33
Pickup and feed block
The pickup-and-feed block picks one sheet of paper from the cassette or the MP tray and feeds it into the fuser.
Figure 1-27
Pickup and feed block
34 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Cassette pickup
The product picks up one sheet of paper from the cassette. The following figure shows the cassette pickup mechanism. Both trays have the same mechanism.
Figure 1-28
Cassette pickup mechanism
DC controller
M1 Drum motor
Cassette pickup clutch
CL
Cassette pickup roller
Feed roller
Cassette separation roller
The operational sequence of the cassette pickup is as follows:
1.
The DC controller rotates the drum motor when it receives a print command from the formatter.
2.
The feed roller rotates.
3.
The cassette pickup solenoid is driven at a specified timing.
4.
The cassette pickup roller rotates and picks up the top paper
5.
The cassette separation roller removes any multiple-fed sheets.
6.
One sheet of paper is fed into the product.
Cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection
The DC controller determines the size of the paper loaded in the cassette and also whether the cassette is installed to the product by monitoring the cassette media width switch and the cassette media end switch.
The cassette media width switch and the cassette media end switch contain three sub-switches each.
The DC controller detects the size of paper and the presence of cassette according to the combination of the switches and notifies the formatter.
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 35
The cassette media-size detection and the cassette-presence detection are not performed during Sleep mode. The following table lists the combination of the switches.
Table 1-7 Media switch combinations
Paper size Cassette media width switch
Top Center Bottom
Cassette media end switch
Top Center Bottom
Cassette absence
A5-R
B5-R
Executive-R
Letter-R
A4-R
8.5 x 13 in
Legal
B4
Ledger
A3
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Cassette lift operation
There are two types of cassette lift operation: cassette lift-up and cassette lift-down. The paper stack surface is lifted up to the pickup position. The lifting plate is lifted down when the pickup operation is not performed. The lift-up and lift-down operations are described in the following. Both upper and lower cassettes perform the same operation.
Lift-up operation
The DC controller rotates the cassette lifter motor until the cassette lift-up sensor detects the lifter rack.
Accordingly the lifter moves up and the lifting plate moves up to the pickup position. The lift-up operation is performed when the product is turned on or when the cassette is installed.
The DC controller determines a cassette lifter motor failure and notifies the formatter when the cassette lift-up sensor does not detect the lifter rack within a specified period from when the lift-up operation starts.
Lift-down operation
The paper loaded in the cassette presses against the cassette pickup roller when the lifting plate is in the pickup position. If this condition is kept for a long time, the paper deformed and a pickup failure may occur. Therefore, the lifting plate is moved down to release the paper from the pickup roller when a print operation is not performed.
36 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
The DC controller reverses the cassette lifter motor until the cassette lift-up sensor stops sensing the lifter rack when a print job is not sent for a specified period.
The DC controller determines a cassette lifter motor failure and notifies the formatter when the cassette lift-up sensor keeps sensing the lifter rack for a specified period from when the lift-down operation starts.
The following figure shows the mechanism of the cassette lift operation for the upper cassette. Both upper and lower cassettes have the same mechanism.
Figure 1-29
Cassette lift operation
Before lift-up
DC controller
M1
Cassette lifter motor
Cassette media out sensor
Cassette pickup roller
Cassette lift-up sensor
SR7
SR10
Lifter rack
Lifter
Lifting plate
After lift-up
DC controller
M1
Cassette media-presence detection
The DC controller detects whether the paper is loaded in the cassette by monitoring the cassette media out sensor. The cassette media-presence detection is not performed during Sleep mode. The DC controller determines a media-absence and notifies the formatter when the cassette media out sensor does not detect the paper.
Cassette multiple-feed prevention
The product uses a cassette separation roller to prevent the multiple sheets of paper from entering to the product. The cassette separation roller follows the rotation of the cassette pickup roller. When multiple
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 37
sheets are picked up, the cassette separation roller does not rotate and only one sheet is fed into the product.
Figure 1-30
Cassette multiple feed prevention
Cassette pickup roller
Cassette separation roller
Paper
<Normal-feed>
The cassette separation roller does not rotate.
<Multiple-feed>
38 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
MP tray pickup
The product picks up one sheet of paper from the MP tray.
Figure 1-31
MP tray pickup
DC controller
Drum motor M1
MP tray pickup roller
SL1
MP tray pickup solenoid
MP tray media out sensor
Paper
SR2
MP tray separation pad
Lifting plate
The operational sequence of the MP tray pickup is as follows:
1.
The DC controller rotates the drum motor when it receives a print command from the formatter.
2.
The MP tray pickup solenoid is driven at a specified timing.
3.
The MP tray pickup roller rotates.
4.
The lifting plate moves up.
5.
The MP tray pickup roller picks up the top paper.
6.
The MP tray separation pad removes any multiple-fed sheets.
7.
One sheet of paper is fed into the product.
MP tray media-presence detection
The DC controller detects whether the paper is loaded in the MP tray by monitoring the MP tray media out sensor. The MP tray media-presence detection is not performed during Sleep mode. The DC controller determines a media-absence and notifies the formatter when the MP tray media out sensor does not detect the paper.
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 39
MP tray multiple-feed prevention
The product uses a MP tray separation pad to prevent the multiple sheets of paper from entering to the product. When multiple sheets are picked up, multiple sheets stop due to the friction against the MP tray separation pad.
Figure 1-32
MP tray multiple-feed prevention
MP tray pickup roller
Paper
MP tray separation pad
<Normal-feed> <Multiple-feed>
Feed-speed control
The feed-speed control adjusts the paper feeding speed to improve the print-quality depending on the paper types. The DC controller feeds the paper at a specified speed according to the print mode designated by the formatter.
The following table shows the print mode and corresponding feed-speed.
Print mode
Auto
Normal
Heavy media 1
Heavy media 2
Heavy media 3
Light media 1
Light media 2
Light media 3
Glossy media 1
Glossy media 2
Feed-speed
—
—
—
1/1
1/1
1/1, 1/2
1/1
1/2
—
—
40 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Print mode Feed-speed
Glossy media 3
Glossy film
Photo media 1
Photo media 2
Photo media 3
Envelope 1
Envelope 2
—
—
1/1
1/2
—
—
—
Envelope 3
OHT
Label
Designated media 1
—
1/2
—
—
Designated media 2 —
1
Designated media 3 —
The product will run at half speed in normal mode when the specific Print Quality, Optimize mode for reducing toner explosions is selected.
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 41
Skew-feed prevention
The product uses a registration shutter to correct the skew feed without decreasing the feeding speed.
Figure 1-33
Skew-feed prevention
Paper
Registration shutter
Feed roller
Registration shutter
Paper
Feed roller
The operational sequence of the skew-feed prevention is as follows:
1.
The leading edge of paper strikes the registration shutter as the paper is fed.
2.
The leading edge of paper is aligned with the shutter.
3.
As the feed roller keeps pushing the paper, the paper warps.
4.
The stiffness of paper pushes up the registration shutter.
5.
The paper passes through the registration shutter and straightens.
42 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Media-length detection
The DC controller detects the length of paper to prevent the toner stain on the transfer roller and also to minimize jam occurrences in the duplexer. The DC controller measures the length of paper by monitoring the time from when the leading edge of paper reaches at the TOP sensor until when the trailing edge passes through and determines the paper size.
The DC controller determines a media-size mismatch and notifies the formatter when the detected paper size is under the following conditions:
●
The detected paper size is different from the size designated by the formatter.
●
The detected paper size is different from the size detected by the cassette media size switch.
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 43
Fuse and delivery block
The fuse and delivery block fuses the toner image onto the paper and delivers the printed page to the face-down output bin.
Figure 1-34
Fuse and delivery block
Output bin
Loop control
The product controls the loop of paper to prevent the defects of print-quality and paper-feed.
●
If the fuser film/pressure roller rotates slower than the photosensitive drum/transfer roller, the paper loop increases.
●
If the fuser film/pressure roller rotates faster than the photosensitive drum/transfer roller, the paper loop decreases.
44 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
The DC controller detects the loop amount by monitoring the loop sensor and controls the rotational speed of the fuser motor.
Figure 1-35
Loop control
Fuser film/Pressure roller rotates slower than photosensitive drum/transfer roller.
DC controller
M3 Fuser motor Drum motor M1
Fuser film
Photosensitive drum
Paper
Loop sensor lever
Pressure roller
SR6
Loop sensor
Fuser film/Pressure roller rotates faster than photosensitive drum/transfer roller.
Transfer roller
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 45
Output bin media-full detection
The DC controller detects whether the output bin is full by monitoring the output bin media full sensor.
Figure 1-36
Output bin media-full detection
DC controller
Output bin media full sensor
SR4
Output bin media full sensor lever
Paper
Output bin
The DC controller determines an output bin media full and notifies the formatter when the output bin media full sensor detects the paper for a specified period during a print operation.
46 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Jam detection
The product uses the following sensors and switches to detect the presence of paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed:
●
Left door interlock switch (SW1)
●
Cartridge door interlock switch (SW2)
●
Cartridge door open detection switch (SW3))
●
TOP sensor (SR9)
●
Loop sensor (SR6)
●
Fuser output sensor (SR12)
●
Output sensor (SR3)
●
Output bin media full sensor (SR4)
●
Right door sensor (SR8)
Figure 1-37
Product engine jam detection sensors and switches
SW1
SR4
SR3
SW3
SW2
SR12
SR9
SR6
No pick jam 1
●
MP tray
The TOP sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period (including two retries) from when the MP tray pickup solenoid is turned on.
●
Standard cassette
The TOP sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period (including two retries) from when the cassette pickup clutch is driven.
●
Duplexer
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 47
The TOP sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the paper passes through the duplex waiting position.
●
Input accessory
The TOP sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the following sensor of the input accessory installed on the top detects the leading edge.
◦
500-sheet paper feeder: PF cassette media feed sensor
◦
1x500-sheet paper deck: PD cassette 1 media feed sensor
◦
3x500-sheet paper deck: PD cassette 1 media feed sensor
◦
3,500-sheet paper deck: HCI cassette media feed sensor
Feed stay jam 1
The TOP sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified period from when it detects the leading edge.
Fuser output delay jam 1
The fuser output sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the TOP sensor detects the leading edge.
Fuser output stay jam 1
The fuser output sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified period from when the TOP sensor detects the trailing edge.
Output delay jam 1
The output sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the
TOP sensor detects the leading edge.
Output delay jam 2
The output bin media full sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the TOP sensor detects the leading edge.
Output stay jam 1
The output sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified period from when the fuser TOP sensor detects the trailing edge.
48 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Residual paper jam 1
Either one of the following sensors detects a paper-presence when the product is turned on or when the door is closed:
●
TOP sensor
●
Loop sensor
●
Fuser output sensor
Either one of the following sensors detects a paper-presence when the automatic delivery is complete:
●
TOP sensor
●
Loop sensor
●
Fuser output sensor
●
Output sensor
Fuser wrap jam 1
The fuser output sensor detects a paper-absence within a specified period from when it detects the leading edge of paper.
Door open jam 1
Either one of the following switches or sensor detects a door open during a paper feed operation:
●
Left door interlock switch
●
Cartridge door interlock switch
●
Cartridge door open detection switch
●
Right door sensor
Multiple-feed jam 1
The sub thermistor 1 detects 300°C (572°F) or higher for a specified period from when the multiple fed sheets passes through the TOP sensor.
Automatic delivery
The product automatically clears the paper if the output sensor detects the residual paper when the product is turned on or when the door is closed.
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 49
500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 4)
The paper feeder is optionally installed at bottom of the product. It picks up the paper and feeds it to the product. The paper feeder controller controls the operational sequence of the paper feeder.
Figure 1-38
500-sheet paper feeder paper path
PF cassette pickup roller
500-sheet paper feeder
PF cassette separation roller
PF cassette feed roller
Figure 1-39
500-sheet paper feeder signal flow
500-sheet paper feeder
Motor
+24V
Solenoid
DC controller
PF controller
Photointerrupter
Switch
50 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Table 1-8 500-sheet paper feeder electrical components
Component Abbreviation
Motor
Solenoid
Photointerrupter
Switch
M1
M2
SL1
SR1
SR2
SR3
SW1
SW2
SW3
Component name
PF cassette pickup motor
PF cassette lifter motor
PF cassette pickup solenoid
PF cassette media feed sensor
PF cassette media stack surface sensor
PF cassette media out sensor
PF right door open detection switch
PF cassette media width switch
PF cassette media end switch
500-sheet paper feeder motor control
The paper feeder has two motors for the paper-feed and cassette lift-up.
Figure 1-40
500-sheet paper feeder motor locations
PF cassette lifter motor
PF cassette pickup motor
Table 1-9 500-sheet paper feeder motors
Motor
M1
M2
PF cassette pickup motor
PF cassette lifter motor
Components driven
Pickup roller, separation roller and feed roller for the PF cassette
Lifter for the PF cassette
500-sheet paper feeder failure detection
The paper feeder controller determines a cassette lifter motor failure according to the condition of the related part. The paper feeder controller does not determine if the cassette pickup motor has failed; therefore, a jam occurs when the motor fails.
ENWW 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 4) 51
500-sheet paper feeder pickup and feed operation
The pickup-and-feed operation picks up one sheet of paper in the paper feeder cassette and feeds it to the product.
Figure 1-41
500-sheet paper feeder pickup and feed components
SR1
SR3 SR2
SW2 SW3
SW1
SL1
M2
Table 1-10 500-sheet paper feeder pickup and feed components
M1
Component Signal
M1
M2
SL1
SR1
SR2
SR3
SW1
SW2
SW3
PF cassette pickup motor
PF cassette lifter motor
PF CASSETTE PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL signal
PF CASSETTE LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL signal
PF cassette pickup solenoid
PF cassette media feed sensor
PF CASSETTE PICKUP SOLENOID signal
PF CASSETTE MEDIA FEED signal
PF cassette media stack surface sensor PF CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE signal
PF cassette media out sensor PF CASSETTE MEDIA OUT signal
PF right door open detection switch
PF cassette media width switch
PF cassette media end switch
PF RIGHT DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal
PF CASSETTE MEDIA WIDTH signal
PF CASSETTE MEDIA END signal
52 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
500-sheet paper feeder cassette pickup
The paper feeder picks up one sheet of paper from the cassette.
Figure 1-42
500-sheet paper feeder pickup and feed cassette pickup
PF controller
2
M1
PF cassette pickup motor
1
PF cassette feed roller
Cassette pickup arm
1. Cassette pickup cam rotates
2. Cassette pickup arm lowers
SL1
PF cassette pickup solenoid
PF cassette pickup roller
PF cassette separation roller
3
Cassette pickup cam
Lifting plate
The operational sequence of the cassette pickup is as follows:
3. PF cassette pickup roller
picks up the paper
1.
The paper feeder controller rotates the PF cassette pickup motor when it receives a print command from the formatter.
2.
The PF cassette pickup roller, PF cassette feed roller and PF cassette separation roller rotate.
3.
The PF cassette pickup solenoid is driven at a specified timing.
4.
The cassette pickup cam rotates.
5.
The cassette pickup arm lowers and the PF cassette pickup roller picks up the top paper.
6.
The PF cassette separation roller removes any multiple-fed sheets.
7.
One sheet of paper is fed into the product.
500-sheet paper feeder cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection
The paper feeder controller determines the size of paper loaded in the cassette and also whether the cassette is installed to the paper feeder by monitoring the PF cassette media width switch and the PF cassette media end switch.
The PF cassette media width switch and the PF cassette media end switch contain three sub-switches each. The paper feeder controller detects the size of paper and the presence of cassette according to the combination of the sub-switches and notifies the formatter.
ENWW 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 4) 53
The cassette media-size detection and the cassette-presence detection are not performed during Sleep mode.
Table 1-11 500-sheet paper feeder media switch combinations
Paper size Cassette media width switch
Top Center Bottom
Cassette media end switch
Top Center Bottom
Cassette absence
A5-R
B5-R
Executive-R
Letter-R
A4-R
8.5 x 13 in
Legal
B4
Ledger
A3
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
500-sheet paper feeder lift-up operation
The paper feeder performs the lift-up operation to keep the surface of paper at the pickup position whenever the following occurs:
●
The product is turned on
●
The cassette is installed
●
The paper stack surface lowers by pickup operation
Figure 1-43
500-sheet paper feeder lift-up operation
PF cassette media stack surface sensor
SR2
Lifting plate
Lifter
M2 PF cassette lifter motor
54 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
The operational sequence of the lift-up is as follows:
1.
The lifter motor rotates to raise the lifter.
2.
The lifter motor stops when the PF cassette media stack surface sensor detects the paper surface.
3.
The lifter motor rotates again when the PF cassette media stack surface sensor detects that the stack surface lowers during a print operation.
The paper feeder controller determines a PF cassette lifter motor failure and notifies the formatter through the DC controller when the PF cassette media stack surface sensor does not detect the paper surface within a specified period from when the PF cassette lifter motor starts rotating.
500-sheet paper feeder cassette media-presence detection
The paper feeder controller detects whether the paper is loaded in the cassette by monitoring the PF cassette media out sensor.
The cassette media-presence detection is not performed during Sleep mode.
The paper feeder controller determines a media-absence and notifies the formatter through the DC controller when the PF cassette media out sensor does not detect the paper.
500-sheet paper feeder cassette multiple-feed prevention
The paper feeder uses a PF cassette separation roller to prevent the multiple sheets of paper from entering to the product.
The PF cassette separation roller transmits its driving force so that the roller rotates in the same direction with the PF cassette feed roller.
●
When one sheet of paper is picked up, driving force from the PF cassette feed roller transmits through the single sheet of paper because the torque limiter functions and the PF cassette separation roller follows the PF cassette feed roller. Therefore, single sheet is fed into the product.
●
When multiple sheets of paper are picked up, driving force from the PF cassette feed roller becomes weak due to a low friction between the sheets. The PF cassette separation roller rotates
ENWW 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 4) 55
by its own driving force and the multiple-fed paper are pushed back to the cassette. Therefore, single sheet is fed into the product.
Figure 1-44
500-sheet paper feeder multiple-feed prevention
PF cassette feed roller
PF cassette pickup roller
Paper
Driving force transmitted from the PF cassette feed roller
Driving force transmitted from the PF cassette pickup motor
PF cassette separation roller
<Normal-feed> <Multiple-feed>
500-sheet paper feeder jam detection
The paper feeder uses the PF cassette media feed sensor (SR1) to detect the presence of paper and to check whether paper is being fed correctly or has jammed.
Figure 1-45
500-sheet paper feeder cassette jam detection sensor
PF cassette media feed sensor
SR1
No pick jam 2
The PF cassette media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period
(including 2 retries) from when the PF cassette pickup solenoid is turned on.
Residual paper jam 1
The PF cassette media feed sensor detects a paper-presence when the automatic delivery is complete.
56 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Door open jam 1
A PF right door open is detected during a paper feed operation.
500-sheet paper feeder automatic delivery
The paper feeder automatically clears the paper if the PF cassette media feed sensor detects the residual paper when the product is turned on or when the door is closed.
ENWW 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 4) 57
1x500 and 3x500 paper feeder and stand
The 1x500-sheet paper feeder is optionally installed at the bottom of the product or 500-sheet paper feeder. The 3x500-sheet paper feeder is optionally installed at bottom of the product only. Each of the paper feeders pick up the paper and feed it to the product. The paper feeder controller controls the operational sequence of the paper feeder.
Figure 1-46
Paper deck paper path
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
PD cassette pickup roller
PD cassette feed roller
3x500-sheet paper deck PD cassette separation roller
58 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Figure 1-47
Paper deck signal flow
DC controller
+24V
PD controller 1
(3x500 only)
PD controller 2
Paper deck cassette 1
Motor
Solenoid
Sensor
Switch
(3x500 only)
Paper deck cassette 2
Motor
Solenoid
Sensor
(3x500 only)
PD controller 3
Paper deck cassette 3
Motor
Solenoid
Sensor
ENWW
Table 1-12 Paper deck electrical components
Component Abbreviation
Motor M1
M2
M81
M82
M91
M92
Component name
PD cassette 1 pickup motor
PD cassette 1 lifter motor
PD cassette 2 pickup motor
PD cassette 2 lifter motor
PD cassette 3 pickup motor
PD cassette 3 lifter motor
1x500 and 3x500 paper feeder and stand 59
Table 1-12 Paper deck electrical components (continued)
Component Abbreviation Component name
Solenoid PD cassette 1 pickup solenoid
Photointerrupter
Switch
SR82
SR83
SR91
SR92
SR93
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW82
SW83
SW92
SW93
SL1
SL82
SL92
SR1
SR1
SR3
SR81
PD cassette 2 pickup solenoid
PD cassette 3 pickup solenoid
PD cassette 1 media feed sensor
PD cassette 1 media feed sensor
PD cassette 1 media out sensor
PD cassette 2 media feed sensor
PD cassette 2 media stack surface sensor
PD cassette 2 media out sensor
PD cassette 3 media feed sensor
PD cassette 3 media stack surface sensor
PD cassette 3 media out sensor
PD right door open detection switch
PD cassette 1 media width switch
PD cassette 1 media end switch
PD cassette 2 media width switch
PD cassette 2 media end switch
PD cassette 3 media width switch
PD cassette 3 media end switch
1
Applies to the 3x500 paper deck only.
60 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Paper deck motor control
The paper deck has two motors in each cassette for the paper-feed and cassette lift-up.
Figure 1-48
Paper deck motors
PD cassette lifter motor
PD cassette pickup motor
Table 1-13 Paper deck motors
Motor
M1
M2
M81
M82
M91
M92
PD cassette 1 pickup motor
PD cassette 1 lifter motor
PD cassette 2 pickup motor
PD cassette 2 lifter motor
PD cassette 3 pickup motor
PD cassette 3 lifter motor
Components driven
Pickup roller, separation roller and feed roller for the PD cassette 1
Lifter for the PD cassette 1
Pickup roller, separation roller and feed roller for the PD cassette 2
Lifter for the PD cassette 2
Pickup roller, separation roller and feed roller for the PD cassette 3
Lifter for the PD cassette 3
Paper deck failure detection
The paper deck controller determines a PD cassette lifter motor failure according to the condition of the related part.
The paper deck controller does not determine if the PD cassette pickup motor has failed; therefore, a jam occurs when the motor fails.
Paper deck pickup-and-feed operation
The pickup-and-feed operation picks up one sheet of paper in the paper deck cassette and feeds it to the product.
ENWW 1x500 and 3x500 paper feeder and stand 61
NOTE:
The following figure illustrates the mechanism for paper deck cassette 3, but each paper deck cassette has the same mechanism.
Figure 1-49
Paper deck pickup and feed components
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
SW92 SW93
SR93 SR92
SR91
SW1
62
SL91
M92
Table 1-14 Paper deck pickup-and-feed operation components
Abbreviation Component Signal
M91
M82
SL81
SR81
SR82
SW1
SW2
SW3
M81
SR83
SW82
M1
M2
SL1
SR1
SR2
SR3
PD cassette 1 pickup motor
PD cassette 1 lifter motor
PD cassette 1 pickup solenoid
PD cassette 1 media feed sensor
PD cassette 1 media stack surface sensor
PD cassette 1 media out sensor
PD right door open detection switch
PD cassette 1 media width switch
PD cassette 1 media end switch
PD cassette 2 pickup motor
PD cassette 2 lifter motor
PD cassette 2 pickup solenoid
PD cassette 2 media feed sensor
PD cassette 2 media stack surface sensor
PD cassette 2 media out sensor
PD cassette 2 media width switch
PD CASSETTE 1 PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL signal
PD CASSETTE 1 LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL signal
PD CASSETTE 1 PICKUP SOLENOID signal
PD CASSETTE 1 MEDIA FEED signal
PD CASSETTE 1 MEDIA STACK SURFACE signal
PD CASSETTE 1 MEDIA OUT signal
PD RIGHT DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal
PD CASSETTE 1 MEDIA WIDTH signal
PD CASSETTE 1 MEDIA END signal
PD CASSETTE 2 PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL signal
PD CASSETTE 2 LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL signal
PD CASSETTE 2 PICKUP SOLENOID signal
PD CASSETTE 2 MEDIA FEED signal
PD CASSETTE 2 MEDIA STACK SURFACE signal
PD CASSETTE 2 MEDIA OUT signal
PD CASSETTE 2 MEDIA WIDTH signal
Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Table 1-14 Paper deck pickup-and-feed operation components (continued)
Abbreviation Component Signal
SW83
M91
M92
SL91
SR91
SR92
SR93
SW92
SW93
PD cassette 2 media end switch
PD cassette 3 pickup motor
PD cassette 3 lifter motor
PD cassette 3 pickup solenoid
PD cassette 3 media feed sensor
PD cassette 3 media stack surface sensor
PD cassette 3 media out sensor
PD cassette 3 media width switch
PD cassette 3 media end switch
PD CASSETTE 2 MEDIA END signal
PD CASSETTE 3 PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL signal
PD CASSETTE 3 LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL signal
PD CASSETTE 3 PICKUP SOLENOID signal
PD CASSETTE 3 MEDIA FEED signal
PD CASSETTE 3 MEDIA STACK SURFACE signal
PD CASSETTE 3 MEDIA OUT signal
PD CASSETTE 3 MEDIA WIDTH signal
PD CASSETTE 3 MEDIA END signal
Paper deck cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection
The paper deck controller detects the size of paper loaded in the cassette and also whether the cassette is installed to the paper deck by monitoring the PD cassette media width switch and the PD cassette media end switch.
The PD cassette media width switch and the PD cassette media end switch contain three subswitches each. The paper deck controller detects the size of paper and the presence of cassette according to the combination of the sub-switches and notifies the formatter.
The cassette media-size detection and the cassette-presence detection are not performed during Sleep mode.
Table 1-15 Paper deck media switch combinations
Paper size Cassette media width switch
Cassette absence
A5-R
B5-R
Executive-R
Letter-R
A4-R
8.5 x 13 in
Legal
B4
Top
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Center
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Bottom
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Cassette media end switch
Top Center
OFF OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Bottom
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ENWW 1x500 and 3x500 paper feeder and stand 63
Table 1-15 Paper deck media switch combinations (continued)
Paper size Cassette media width switch
Top Center Bottom
Cassette media end switch
Top Center
Ledger OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
A3 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Bottom
ON
ON
Paper deck lift-up operation
The paper deck lifts up the tray to keep the surface of paper at the pickup position whenever the following occurs:
●
The product is turned on
●
The cassette is installed
●
The paper stack surface lowers by pickup operation
NOTE:
The following figure illustrates the mechanism for paper deck cassette 3, but each paper deck cassette has the same mechanism.
Figure 1-50
Paper deck lift-up operation
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
PD cassette 3 media stack surface sensor
SR92
Cassette 3
Lifting plate
Lifter
PD cassette 3 lifter motor M92
The operational sequence of the lift-up is as follows:
1.
The PD cassette 3 lifter motor rotates to raise the lifter.
2.
The PD cassette 3 lifter motor stops when the PD cassette 3 media stack surface sensor detects the paper surface.
3.
The PD cassette 3 lifter motor rotates again when the PD cassette 3 media stack surface sensor detects that the stack surface lowers during a print operation.
64 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
The paper deck controller 3 determines a PD cassette 3 lifter motor failure and notifies the formatter through the DC controller when the PD cassette 3 media stack surface sensor does not detect the paper surface within a specified period from when the PD cassette 3 lifter motor starts rotating.
Paper deck cassette media-presence detection
The paper deck controller detects whether the paper is loaded in the cassette by monitoring the PD cassette media out sensor.
The cassette media-presence detection is not performed during Sleep mode.
The paper deck controller determines a media-absence and notifies the formatter through the DC controller when the PD cassette media out sensor does not detect the paper.
Paper deck jam detection
The paper deck uses the following sensors to detect the presence of paper and to check whether paper is being fed correctly or has jammed:
●
PD cassette 1 media feed sensor (SR1)
●
PD cassette 2 media feed sensor (SR81) (3x500-sheet paper deck only)
●
PD cassette 3 media feed sensor (SR91) (3x500-sheet paper deck only)
Figure 1-51
Paper deck jam detection sensors
PD cassette 1 media feed sensor
SR1
PD cassette 2 media feed sensor
SR81
PD cassette 3 media feed sensor
SR91
No pick jam 2
The PD cassette 1 media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period (including 2 retries) from when the PD cassette 1 pickup solenoid is turned on.
The PD cassette 1 media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the PD cassette 2 media feed sensor detects the leading edge. (3x500-sheet paper deck only)
ENWW 1x500 and 3x500 paper feeder and stand 65
The PD cassette 1 media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the PD cassette 3 media feed sensor detects the leading edge. (3x500-sheet paper deck only)
No pick jam 3 (3x500-sheet paper deck only)
The PD cassette 2 media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period (including two retries) from when the PD cassette 2 pickup solenoid is turned on.
The PD cassette 3 media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period (including two retries) from when the PD cassette 3 pickup solenoid is turned on.
Residual paper jam 1
The following sensor detects a paper-presence when the automatic delivery is complete.
●
PD cassette 1 media feed sensor
●
PD cassette 2 media feed sensor (3x500-sheet paper deck only)
●
PD cassette 3 media feed sensor (3x500-sheet paper deck only)
Door open jam 1
A PD right door open is detected during a paper feed operation.
Paper deck automatic delivery
The paper deck automatically clears the paper if either one of the following sensor detects the residual paper when the product is turned on or when the door is closed:
●
PD cassette 1 media feed sensor
●
PD cassette 2 media feed sensor (3x500-sheet paper deck only)
●
PD cassette 3 media feed sensor (3x500-sheet paper deck only
66 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder
The 3,500-sheet paper deck is optionally installed at bottom of the product or the 500-sheet paper feeder. It picks up the paper and feeds it to the product. The HCI controller controls the operational sequence of the 3,500-sheet paper deck.
Figure 1-52
HCI paper path
3,500-sheet paper deck
Right cassette
Left cassette
HCI cassette pickup roller HCI cassette separation roller
HCI cassette feed roller
ENWW 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder 67
Figure 1-53
HCI signal flow
DC controller
+24V
HCI controller
Table 1-16 HCI electrical components
Component Abbreviation
Motor
Solenoid
Photointerrupter
Switch
PS3103
PS3201
PS3202
PS3203
PS3301
PS3302
PS3303
PS3304
M3301
M3302
M3303
M3304
SL3301
SL3302
PS3101
PS3102
PS3305
PS3306
SW3301
SW3302
SW3303
3,500-sheet paper deck
Motor
Solenoid
Photointerrupter
Switch
Component name
HCI right cassette pickup motor
HCI right cassette lifter motor
HCI left cassette lifter motor
HCI left cassette pickup motor
HCI right cassette pickup solenoid
HCI left cassette pickup solenoid
HCI right cassette media stack surface 2 sensor
HCI right cassette media stack surface 1 sensor
HCI right cassette media out sensor
HCI left cassette media stack surface 2 sensor
HCI left cassette media stack surface 1 sensor
HCI left cassette media out sensor
HCI media feed sensor
HCI right cassette media feed sensor
HCI right cassette media size sensor
HCI left cassette media size sensor
HCI left cassette media feed sensor
HCI long edge feed guide open detection sensor
HCI right door open detection switch
HCI right cassette open detection switch
HCI left cassette open detection switch
68 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
HCI motor control
The HCI has two motors in each cassette for the paper-feed and cassette lift-up.
Figure 1-54
HCI motors
HCI cassette pickup motor
HCI cassette lifter motor
Table 1-17 HCI motors
Motor
M3301 HCI right cassette pickup motor
M3302
M3303
M3304
HCI right cassette lifter motor
HCI left cassette lifter motor
HCI left cassette pickup motor
Components driven
Pickup roller, separation roller and feed roller for the HCI right cassette
Lifter for the HCI right cassette
Lifter for the HCI left cassette
Pickup roller, separation roller and feed roller for the HCI left cassette
HCI failure detection
The HCI controller determines a lifter motor failure according to the condition of the related part.
The HCI controller does not determine if the HCI cassette pickup motor has failed; therefore, a jam occurs when the motor fails.
ENWW 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder 69
HCI pickup-and-feed operation
The pickup-and-feed operation picks up one sheet of paper in the 3,500-sheet paper deck cassette and feeds it to the product.
Figure 1-55
HCI pickup-and-feed operation
M3304 M3301
SL3302
PS3203
PS3201 PS3202
PS3305
PS3103
PS3301
PS3306
PS3101 PS3102
SL3301
PS3302
SW3303 PS3304
SW3302 PS3303
70
M3303 M3302
Table 1-18 HCI pickup-and-feed operation components
Abbreviation Component Signal
M3301 HCI right cassette pickup motor
M3302
M3303
M3304
SL3301
SL3302
PS3101
PS3102
HCI right cassette lifter motor
HCI left cassette lifter motor
HCI left cassette pickup motor
HCI right cassette pickup solenoid
HCI left cassette pickup solenoid
HCI right cassette media stack surface 2 sensor
HCI right cassette media stack surface 1 sensor
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL signal
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL signal
HCI LEFT CASSETTE LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL signal
HCI LEFT CASSETTE PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL signal
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE PICKUP SOLENOID signal
HCI LEFT CASSETTE PICKUP SOLENOID signal
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE 2 signal
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE 1 signal
Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Table 1-18 HCI pickup-and-feed operation components (continued)
Abbreviation Component Signal
PS3103
PS3201
PS3202
PS3203
PS3301
PS3302
PS3303
PS3304
PS3305
PS3306
SW3301
SW3302
SW3303
HCI right cassette media out sensor
HCI left cassette media stack surface 2 sensor
HCI left cassette media stack surface 1 sensor
HCI left cassette media out sensor
HCI media feed sensor
HCI right cassette media feed sensor
HCI right cassette media size sensor
HCI left cassette media size sensor
HCI left cassette media feed sensor
HCI long edge feed guide open detection sensor
HCI right door open detection switch
HCI right cassette open detection switch
HCI left cassette open detection switch
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA OUT signal
HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE 2 signal
HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE 1 signal
HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA OUT signal
HCI MEDIA FEED signal
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA FEED signal
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA SIZE signal
HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA SIZE signal
HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA FEED signal
HCI LONG EDGE FEED GUIDE OPEN DETECTION signal
HCI RIGHT DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE OPEN DETECTION signal
HCI LEFT CASSETTE OPEN DETECTION signal
HCI cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection
The HCI controller detects the size of paper loaded in the cassette by monitoring the HCI cassette media size sensors. It determines whether A4-R or Letter-R is loaded and notifies the formatter through the DC controller. It also detects whether the cassette is installed to the 3,500-sheet paper deck by monitoring the HCI cassette open detection switches and notifies the formatter through the DC controller.
The cassette media-size detection and the cassette-presence detection are not performed during Sleep mode.
ENWW 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder 71
HCI lift-up operation
The HCI lifts up the tray to keep the surface of the paper at the pickup position whenever the following occurs:
●
The product is turned on
●
The cassette is installed
●
The paper stack surface lowers by pickup operation
Figure 1-56
HCI lift-up operation
Wire HCI left cassette media stack surface 1 sensor
PS3202
PS3201
HCI left cassette media stack surface 2 sensor
Tray
Pulley
M3303
HCI left cassette lifter motor
The figure above illustrates the mechanism for the left cassette, but each HCI cassette has the same mechanism.
The operational sequence of the lift-up is as follows:
1.
The HCI cassette lifter motor rotates the pulley to reel the wire. Accordingly the tray moves up.
2.
The HCI cassette lifter motor stops when the HCI cassette media stack surface 2 sensor detects the paper surface.
3.
The HCI cassette lifter motor rotates again when the HCI cassette media stack surface 1 sensor detects that the stack surface lowers during a print operation.
The HCI controller determines an HCI cassette lifter motor failure and notifies the formatter through the
DC controller when the HCI cassette media stack surface 2 sensor does not detect the paper surface within a specified period from when the HCI cassette lifter motor starts rotating.
HCI cassette media-presence detection
The HCI controller detects whether the paper is loaded in the cassette by monitoring the HCI cassette media out sensor.
The cassette media-presence detection is not performed during Sleep mode.
72 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
The HCI controller determines a media-absence and notifies the formatter through the DC controller when the HCI cassette media out sensor does not detect the paper.
ENWW 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder 73
HCI jam detection
The HCI uses the following sensors to detect the presence of paper and to check whether paper is being fed correctly or has jammed:
●
HCI media feed sensor (PS3301)
●
HCI right cassette media feed sensor (PS3302)
●
HCI left cassette media feed sensor (PS3305)
Figure 1-57
HCI jam detection sensors
HCI left cassette media feed sensor HCI media feed sensor
PS3305 PS3301
HCI right cassette media feed sensor
PS3302
No pick jam 2
The HCI media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the HCI right cassette media feed sensor detects the leading edge.
The HCI media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the HCI left cassette media feed sensor detects the leading edge.
No pick jam 3
The HCI right cassette media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period, including two times retry, from when the HCI right cassette pickup solenoid is turned on.
The HCI left cassette media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period, including two times retry, from when the HCI left cassette pickup solenoid is turned on.
74 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Residual paper jam 1
Either one of the following sensors detects a paper-presence when the automatic delivery is complete:
●
HCI media feed sensor
●
HCI right cassette media feed sensor
●
HCI left cassette media feed sensor
Door open jam 1
An HCI right door open or an HCI long edge feed guide open is detected during a paper-feed operation.
HCI automatic delivery
The HCI automatically clears the paper if either one of the following sensors detects the residual paper when the product is turned on or when the door is closed:
●
HCI media feed sensor
●
HCI right cassette media feed sensor
●
HCI left cassette media feed sensor
ENWW 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder 75
Duplexer
The optional duplexer is installed in the left side of the product. The duplexer reverses the output roller and intermediate output roller in the product engine, reverses and feeds the paper passed through the fuser. Then it detects side misregistration to adjust the starting position of the scanning direction for the second side of paper according to the command from the formatter and feeds it to the product engine.
Figure 1-58
Duplexer paper path
Side misregistration sensor
Output roller
Re-pickup roller
Intermediate output roller
Duplex unit
Duplex reverse roller
Duplex re-pickup roller
Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path
Figure 1-59
Duplexer signal flow
Duplex unit
Motor
Fan
DC controller
+24V
Duplex controller
Clutch
Photointerrupter
Side misregistration sensor
LED
Photoreceiver sensor
NVRAM
76 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Table 1-19 Duplexer electrical components
Component Abbreviation
Motor
Fan
Clutch
Photointerrupter
M1
FM1
CL1
SR1
SR2
Component name
Duplex feed motor
Duplex fan
Duplex feed clutch
Duplex reverse sensor
Duplex re-pickup sensor
Duplexer motor control
The duplexer has one motor. The duplex feed motor reverses the output roller and the intermediate output roller. Also it drives the duplex reverse roller and the duplex re-pickup roller to feed the paper and to drive the side misregistration sensor and the re-pickup roller.
Figure 1-60
Duplexer motor
Duplex feed motor
Table 1-20 Duplexer motor
Motor
M1 Duplex feed motor
Components driven
Duplex reverse roller, duplex re-pickup roller, re-pickup roller, output roller and intermediate output roller
Duplexer motor failure detection
The duplex controller does not determine if the duplex feed motor has failed; therefore, a jam occurs when the motor fails.
ENWW Duplexer 77
Duplexer fan control
The duplex unit has one fan for preventing the temperature from rising in the duplex unit. The duplex controller determines if the duplex fan has failed and notifies the formatter through the DC controller when the fan fails to operate for a specified time during start-up.
Figure 1-61
Duplexer fan
Duplex fan
Table 1-21 Duplexer fan
Fan Cooling area
FM1 Duplex fan Duplexer inside
Type
Exhaust
Speed
Full
Duplexer fan failure detection
The duplex controller determines if the duplex fan has failed and notifies the formatter when the fan locks for a specified time during start-up.
Duplexer reverse and feed operation
The duplexer reverses the feed and delivery rollers in the product to print on both sides. The paper that passed through the fuser unit reverses its feeding direction and is fed to the duplexer. The duplexer
78 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
feeds the paper and performs horizontal registration to align the starting position of the main scan for the second-side print. Then, the paper is fed into the product engine unit again.
Figure 1-62
Duplexer reverse and feed operation
Output roller
Reverse position
Re-pickup waiting position
Intermediate output roller
Fuser output sensor
M1
SR1
CL1
SR2
Side misregistration sensor
Table 1-22 Duplexer reverse and feed components
Component Signal
M1
CL1
SR1
SR2
Duplex feed motor
Duplex feed clutch
DUPLEX FEED MOTOR CONTROL signal
DUPLEX FEED CLUTCH signal
Duplex reverse sensor DUPLEX FEED signal
Duplex re-pickup sensor DUPLEX RE-PICKUP signal
Duplexer reverse and feed operation sequence
The operational sequence of the reverse-and-feed operation is as follows:
1.
The paper printed on the first side passes through the fuser.
2.
The DC controller feeds the paper until the trailing edge of paper reaches the reverse position after the fuser output sensor detects the trailing edge.
3.
The duplex controller reverses the output roller and the intermediate output roller to feed the paper to the duplexer from the reverse position.
4.
The duplex controller detects the image starting position according to the side misregistration sensor and feeds the paper to the re-pickup waiting position.
5.
The duplex controller stops the paper temporarily at the re-pickup waiting position when the paper is standard size but shorter than Letter-R. It feeds the paper to the product engine again if a print
ENWW Duplexer 79
command is sent from the formatter. If a print command is sent before the paper reaches the repickup waiting position, the duplex controller does not stop the paper.
If the paper is other than standard size or standard size but longer than Letter-R and a print command is sent before the paper reaches the re-pickup waiting position, the duplex controller does not stop the paper. If a print command is not sent before the paper reaches the re-pickup waiting position, the duplex controller notifies the formatter of duplex re-pickup jam 3 through the
DC controller.
Side misregistration detection
The side misregistration detection is a feature to determine the starting position in scanning direction for the second side printing of the paper fed to the duplexer.
The LED and photoreceiver sensor of the side misregistration sensor are located paired at the position of right edge of each standard size paper. The side misregistration sensor reciprocates while lighting the LED which is corresponding to the paper size. The paper passes through in between the LED and photoreceiver sensor.
The side misregistration detection is performed when the duplex re-pickup sensor detects the leading edge of paper. The moving distance of the sensor is measured according to the home-position of the side misregistration sensor and the position where the right edge of paper interrupts LED light. Then the side misregistration amount is calculated by subtracting the distance of nominal position (without side
80 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW misregistration) for each paper size. The side misregistration amount is notified to the formatter through the DC controller as a correction value of scanning start position for the second side printing.
Figure 1-63
Duplexer side misregistration detection
Outline of LED ass’ y
LED for paper right edge detection
LED for home-position detection
LED for
A4-R/A3 size detection
LED for Letter-R size detection
Paper
Flag for home-position detection
CL1
M1
Photoreceiver sensor assembly
Side misregistration sensor
LED assembly
1. Detects home-position
2. Detects right edge of paper
Side misregistration
Sensor position when detecting the home-position
Sensor position when the paper is in niminal position
Sensor opsition when side misregistration of paper is detected
Image starting position
Duplexer 81
Side misregistration failure detection
The duplex controller determines a side misregistration sensor failure and notifies the formatter when it encounters any one of the following condition:
●
The photoreceiver sensor does not output as prescribed when the product is turned on, when the duplexer is installed to the product or when the light intensity is adjusted before the paper is fed to the duplexer.
●
The side registration sensor does not detect the home-position.
●
An NVRAM data abnormality or communication error occurs when the product is turned on, when the duplexer is installed to the product or when the light intensity is adjusted and write/read the
NVRAM data during duplex printing.
Duplexer jam detection
The duplexer uses the following sensors to detect the presence of paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed:
●
Duplex reverse sensor (SR1)
●
Duplex re-pickup sensor (SR2)
Figure 1-64
Duplexer jam detection sensors
SR1 SR2
Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path Duplex re-pickup sensor
Duplex reverse sensor
Fuser output stay jam 2
The fuser output sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified period from when it detects the leading edge.
82 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
Reverse jam 1
The duplex reverse sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when a reverse operation starts.
Duplex re-pickup jam 1
The duplex re-pickup sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the duplex reverse sensor detects the leading edge.
Duplex re-pickup jam 2
The duplexer is removed or the communication with the duplexer is failed during a period from when the reverse operation starts until the paper reaches the re-pickup waiting position.
Duplex re-pickup jam 3
A print command is not sent from the formatter before the paper reaches the re-pickup waiting position if the paper is other than standard size or standard size but longer than Letter-R.
Residual paper jam 1
Either one of the following sensors detects a paper-presence when the automatic delivery is complete:
●
Duplex reverse sensor
●
Duplex re-pickup sensor
Duplexer automatic delivery
The product automatically clears the paper if any one of the following sensors detects the residual paper when the product is turned on or when the door is closed:
●
Duplex reverse sensor (SR1)
●
Duplex re-pickup sensor (SR2)
ENWW Duplexer 83
84 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW
2 Solve problems
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Print quality troubleshooting tools
●
●
●
●
●
●
ENWW 85
Solve problems checklist
Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the product.
1.
If the control panel is blank or black, complete these steps:
a. Check the power cable.
b. Check that the power is turned on.
c.
Make sure that the line voltage is correct for the product power configuration. (See the label that is on the back of the product for voltage requirements.) If you are using a power strip and its voltage is not within specifications, connect the product directly into the electrical outlet. If it is already connected into the outlet, try a different outlet.
2.
The control panel should indicate a Ready status. If an error message displays, resolve the error.
3.
Check the cabling.
a. Check the cable connection between the product and the computer or network port. Make sure that the connection is secure.
b. Make sure that the cable itself is not faulty by using a different cable, if possible.
c.
Check the network connection.
4.
Ensure that the selected paper size and type meet specifications. Also open the Trays menu on the product control panel and verify that the tray is configured correctly for the paper type and size.
5.
Print a configuration page. If the product is connected to a network, an HP Jetdirect page also prints.
a. At the product control panel, press the Home button.
b. Open the following menus:
◦
Administration
◦
Reports
◦
Configuration/Status Pages c.
Select the Configuration Page option, and then press the OK button.
d. Scroll to the Print option, and then press the OK button to print the page.
If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains paper.
If the page jams in the product, follow the instructions on the control panel to clear the jam.
If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the product hardware.
If the page prints correctly, then the product hardware is working. The problem is with the computer you are using, with the print driver, or with the program.
86 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
6.
Verify that you have installed the print driver for this product. Check the program to make sure that you are using the print driver for this product. The print driver is on the CD that came with the product. You can also download the print driver from this Web site: www.hp.com/go/ lj700M712_software .
7.
Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution works, then the problem is with the program. If this solution does not work (the document does not print), complete these steps:
a. Try printing the job from another computer that has the product software installed.
b. If you connected the product to the network, connect the product directly to a computer with a USB cable. Redirect the product to the correct port, or reinstall the software, selecting the new connection type that you are using.
ENWW Solve problems checklist 87
Menu map
You can print a report of the complete product menus so you can more easily navigate to the individual settings you need.
1.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Administration
●
Reports
●
Configuration/Status Pages
3.
Select the Administration Menu Map option, and then press the OK button.
4.
Scroll to the Print option, and then press the OK button to print the report.
88 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Preboot menu options
If an error occurs while the product is initializing, an error message displays on the control-panel display. The user can open the Preboot menus. The error menu item will not be seen if an error did not occur.
CAUTION:
The 2 Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third-party files (among other files) will be completely lost. HP does not recommend this action without contacting support first.
Open the Preboot menu
1.
Turn the product on.
2.
Wait for both the Ready and Attention LEDs to illuminate and then dim out. The HP logo will appear on the control panel display.
3.
When the LEDs illuminate again, press the Stop button on the control panel.
NOTE:
The period of time for opening the Preboot menu, while the Ready and Attention LEDs are illuminated, is around one second. You might need to press the Stop button repeatedly while the product is starting up to make you sure you gain access to the Preboot menu.
4.
Use the Down arrow button to navigate the Preboot menu options.
5.
Press the OK button to select a menu item.
Cold reset using the Preboot menu
1.
Open the Preboot menu.
a. Turn the product on.
b. Wait for both the Ready and Attention LEDs at the bottom right side of the control panel to illuminate and then dim out. The HP logo will appear on the control panel display.
c.
When the Ready and Attention LEDs illuminate again, press the Stop button on the control panel.
NOTE:
The period of time for accessing the preboot menu, while the Ready and
Attention LEDs are illuminated, is around one second. You may need to press the Stop button repeatedly while the product is starting up to make you sure you gain access to the
Preboot menu.
d. Use the Down arrow button to navigate the preboot menu options.
e. Press the OK button to select a menu item.
2.
Select the 3 Administrator item, and then press the OK button.
3.
Select the 8 Startup Options item, and then press the OK button.
ENWW Preboot menu options 89
4.
Select the 2 Cold Reset item, and then press the OK button.
5.
Press the Home button to highlight the 1 Continue item, and then press the OK button.
NOTE:
The product will initialize.
Table 2-1 Preboot menu options (1 of 6)
Menu option First level Second level Third level
1 Continue
2 Sign In
Description
Selecting the 1 Continue item exits the Preboot menu and continues the normal boot process.
If a selection is not made in the initial menu within 30 seconds, the product returns to a normal boot (the same as selecting 1 Continue.
If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout does not apply.
Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is required to open the Preboot menu.
90 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-1 Preboot menu options (1 of 6) (continued)
Menu option First level Second level Third level
3 Administrator
1 Download 1 Network
2 USB
2 Format Disk
3 USB
Thumbdrive
Description
This item navigates to the 3 Administrator sub menus.
If authentication is required (and the user is not already signed in) the 2 Sign In displays. The user is required to sign in.
This item initiates a preboot firmware download process. A
USB device interface or a Network connection can be used to download firmware.
3 Partial
Clean
This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk partitions.
CAUTION:
Selecting the 2 Format Disk item removes
all data.
A delete confirmation prompt is not provided.
The system is not bootable after this action—a firmware download must be performed to return the system to a bootable state.
This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data except the firmware repository where the master firmware bundle is downloaded and saved).
CAUTION:
Selecting the 3 Partial Clean item removes
all data except the firmware repository.
A delete confirmation prompt is not provided.
This allows user to reformat the disk by removing the firmware image from the active directory without having to download new firmware code (product remains bootable).
Select this item to set or change the administrator password.
4 Change
Password
5 Clear
Password
Select the 5 Clear Password item to remove a password from the Administrator menu. Before the password is actually cleared, a message will be shown asking to confirm that the password should be cleared. Press the OK button to confirm the action.
When the confirmation prompt displays, press the OK button to clear the password.
ENWW Preboot menu options 91
92
Table 2-2 Preboot menu options (2 of 6)
Menu option
3 Administrator
continued
First level
6 Manage
Disk
Second level Third level Description
1 Clear disk
2 Lock Disk
3 Leave
Unlocked
for job storage. Job storage is normally enabled only for the
Boot device. This will be grayed out unless the 99.09.68 error is displayed.
the disk to this product.
The secure disk already locked to this product will remain accessible to this product. Use this function to have more then one encrypted disk accessible by the product when using them interchangeably.
The data stored on the secure disk locked to this product always remains accessible to this product.
the disk in an unlocked mode for single service event. The secure disk that is already locked to this product will remain accessible to this product and uses the old disk's encryption password with the new disk.
The secure disk that is already locked to this product remains accessible to this product.
4 Clear Disk
Pwd
non-secure disk and clear the password associated with the yet to be installed secure disk.
CAUTION:
Data on the missing secure disk will be permanently inaccessible.
5 Retain
Password
6 Boot Device 1 Secure
Erase
disk for this session only, and then search for the missing secure disk in future sessions.
Select the 1 Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk and unlock it if required.
This might take a long time.
NOTE:
The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. ATA secure-erase command one pass over write. Erases entire disk including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk.
2 Erase/
Unlock
Select the 2 Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all data on disk and unlock the disk to allow access to it from any product.
NOTE:
The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. Erases the crypto key. The disk becomes a non-encrypted disk.
3 Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.
Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-3 Preboot menu options (3 of 6)
Menu option First level Second level Third level
3 Administrator
continued
6 Manage
Disk
continued
7 Internal
Device
8 External
Device
Description
1 Secure
Erase
device or get status about the internal device.
Select the 1 Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk and unlock it if required.
This might take a long time.
2 Erase/
Unlock
NOTE:
The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. ATA secure-erase command one pass over write. Erases the entire disk, including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk.
Select the 2 Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all data on disk and unlock the disk to allow access to it from any product.
NOTE:
The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. Erases the HP HIgh Performance Secure Hard
Disk. The disk becomes a non-encrypted disk.
3 Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.
the device or get status about the internal device.
1 Secure
Erase
Select the 1 Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk and unlock it if required.
This might take a long time.
NOTE:
The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled.
2 Erase/
Unlock
The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire disk, including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk.
Select the 2 Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all data on disk and unlock the disk to allow access to it from any product.
NOTE:
The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. Erases the crypto key. The disk becomes a non-encrypted disk.
3 Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.
ENWW Preboot menu options 93
Table 2-4 Preboot menu options (4 of 6)
Menu option First level Second level Third level
3 Administrator
continued
7 Configure
LAN
IP Mode
[DHCP]
IP Mode
[STATIC]
Description
IP Address
Subnet
Mask
Default
Gateway
Save
settings for the Preboot menu firmware upgrade.
The network can be configured obtain the network settings from a DHCP server or as static.
Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition from the
DHCP server.
Use this item to manually assign the network addresses.
Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses.
Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask.
Use this item to manually enter the default gateway.
Select the Save item to save the manual settings.
Table 2-5 Preboot menu options (5 of 6)
Menu option First level Second level Third level
3 Administrator
continued
8 Startup
Options
Description
1 Show
Revision
be set for the next time the product is turned on and initializes to the Ready state.
Not currently functional: Check the 1 Show Revision item to allow the product to initialize and show the firmware version when the product reaches the Ready state.
Once the product power is turned on the next time, the 1
Show Revision item is unchecked so that the firmware revision is not shown.
2 Cold Reset
Check customer settings (this item also returns all settings to factory defaults).
NOTE:
Items in the Service menu are not reset.
3 Skip Disk
Load
4 Skip Cal
5 Lock
Service
the time the power is turned on without calibrating.
CAUTION:
Select the 5 Lock Service item to lock the
Service menu access (both in the preboot menu and the
Device Maintenance menu).
Service personnel must have the administrator remove the 5
Lock Service setting before they can open the Service menu.
94 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-5 Preboot menu options (5 of 6) (continued)
Menu option
3 Administrator
continued
First level
8 Startup
Options
continued
Second level Third level Description
6 Skip FSCK
7 First Power
8 Embedded
JetDirect Off
during startup.
Not currently functional: This item allows the product to initialize as if it is the first time it has been turned on.
For example, the user is prompted to configure first-time settings like date/time, language, and other settings.
Check this item so that it is enabled for the next time the product power is turned on.
When the product power is turned on the next time, this item is unchecked so that the pre-configured settings are used during configuration, and the first-time setting prompt is not used.
the embedded Jetdirect.
By default this item is unchecked so that Jetdirect is always enabled.
Table 2-6 Preboot menu options (6 of 6)
Menu option First level Second level Third level
3 Administrator
continued
9 Diagnostics
A Remote
Admin
1 Memory a Do Not
Run
Description
3 ICB
2 Disk
4 CPB
5
Interconnect
Run Selected
1 Start
Telnet b Short c Long a Do Not
Run b Short c Long d Optimized e Raw f Smart
access the product remotely to troubleshoot issues.
ENWW Preboot menu options 95
Table 2-6 Preboot menu options (6 of 6) (continued)
Menu option First level Second level Third level
4 Service Tools
2 Stop
Telnet
3 Refresh IP
B System Triage 1 Copy Logs
Description
This item requires the service access code. If the product does not reach the Ready state, you can use this item to print the error logs. The logs can be copied to a USB storage accessory when the product is initialized, and then these encrypted files can be sent to HP to help determine what is causing the problem.
Use this item to reset the administrator password.
5 Developer
Tools
3 Reset
Password
2 Subsystems
1 Netexec
For manufacturing use only. Do not change these values.
96 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Current settings pages
Printing the current settings pages provides a map of the user configurable settings that might be helpful in the troubleshooting process.
1.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Administration
●
Reports
●
Configuration/Status Pages
3.
Select the Current Settings Page option, and then press the OK button.
4.
Scroll to the Print option, and then press the OK button to print the report.
ENWW Current settings pages 97
Troubleshooting process
Determine the problem source
When the product malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the product control panel alerts you to the situation. A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem. The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems.
●
Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction.
Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:
●
Are supply items within their rated life?
●
Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?
NOTE:
The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition.
Troubleshooting flowchart
This flowchart highlights the general processes that you can follow to quickly isolate and solve product hardware problems.
Each row depicts a major troubleshooting step. A “yes” answer to a question allows you to proceed to the next major step. A “no” answer indicates that more testing is needed. Go to the appropriate section in this chapter, and follow the instructions there. After completing the instructions, go to the next major step in this troubleshooting flowchart.
Table 2-7 Troubleshooting flowchart
1
Power on
2
Control panel messages
Is the product on and does a readable message display?
Yes
No
Does the message Ready display on the control panel?
Yes
No
Follow the power-on troubleshooting checks. See
.
After the control panel display is functional, see step 2.
After the errors have been corrected, go to step 3.
3
Event log
Open the Troubleshooting menu and print an event log to see the history of errors with this product.
Does the event log print?
Yes
No
If the event log does not print, check for error messages.
If paper jams inside the product, see the jams section of the product service manual.
If error messages display on the control panel when you try to print an event log, see the control panel message section of the service manual.
After successfully printing and evaluating the event log, see step 4.
98 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-7 Troubleshooting flowchart (continued)
4
Information pages
Open the Reports menu and print the configuration pages to verify that all the accessories are installed.
Are all the accessories installed?
Yes
No
5
Image quality
6
Interface
Does the print quality meet the customer's requirements?
Yes
No
Can the customer print successfully from the host computer?
Yes. This is the end of the troubleshooting process.
No
If accessories that are installed are not listed on the configuration page, remove the accessory and reinstall it.
After evaluating the configuration pages, see step 5.
Compare the images with the sample defects in the image defect tables. See the images defects table in the product service manual.
After the print quality is acceptable, see step 6.
Verify that all I/O cables are connected correctly and that a valid
IP address is listed on the Jetdirect configuration page.
If error messages display on the control panel when you try to print an event log, see the control panel message section of the service manual.
When the customer can print from the host computer, this is the end of the troubleshooting process.
Power subsystem
Power-on checks
The basic product functions should start up when the product is connected into an electrical outlet and the power switch is pushed to the on position. If the product does not start, use the information in this section to isolate and solve the problem.
Power-on troubleshooting overview
Turn on the product power. If the control panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the control panel display, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem.
During normal operation, the main cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the product power is turned on. Place your hand over the holes in the left-side cover, near the formatter. If the fan is operating, you will feel air passing out of the product. You can also lean close to the product and hear the fan operating. You can also place your hand over the hole in the right-rear lower corner. If the fan is operating, you should feel air being drawn into the product. When this fan is operational, the DC side of the power supply is functioning correctly.
After the fan is operating, the main motor turns on (unless the right or front cover is open, a jam condition is sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You might be able to visually and audibly determine if the main motor is turned on.
If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine, formatter, and control panel problems. Perform an engine test. If the formatter is damaged, it might interfere with the engine test. If the engine-test page does not print, try removing the formatter
ENWW Troubleshooting process 99
and then performing the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the problem is almost certainly with the formatter, the control panel, or the cable that connects them.
If the control panel is blank when you turn on the product, check the following items.
1.
Make sure that the product is connected directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip) that delivers the correct voltage.
2.
Make sure that the power switch is in the on position.
3.
Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational.
4.
Make sure that the control panel display wire harness is connected.
5.
Make sure that the formatter is seated and operating correctly. Turn off the product and remove the formatter. Reinstall the formatter, and then verify that the heartbeat LED is blinking.
6.
Remove any external solutions, and then try to turn the product on again.
NOTE:
If the control panel display is blank, but the main cooling fan runs briefly after the product power is turned on, try printing an engine-test page to determine whether the problem is with the control-panel display, formatter, or other product assemblies.
100 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
The section describes the tools that can help you solve problems with your device.
Individual component diagnostics
LED diagnostics
LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot product problems.
Understand lights on the formatter
Two LEDs on the formatter indicate that the product is functioning correctly.
1
2
3
1
2
3
HP Jetdirect LEDs
Connectivity LED
Heartbeat LED
Heartbeat LED
The heartbeat LED provides information about product operation. If a product error occurs, the formatter displays a message on the control-panel display. However, error situations can occur causing the formatter to control panel communication to be interrupted.
NOTE:
HP recommends fully troubleshooting the formatter and control panel before replacing either assembly. Use the heartbeat LED to troubleshoot formatter and control panel errors to avoid unnecessarily replacing these assemblies.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 101
Formatter to control panel communication interruptions
●
The firmware does not fully initialize and configure the control panel interface.
●
The control panel is not functioning (either a failed assembly or power problem).
●
Interface cabling between the formatter and control panel is damaged or disconnected.
TIP:
If the connectivity LED is illuminated, the formatter is fully seated and the power is on. The pins for the LED circuit in the formatter connector are recessed so that this LED will not illuminate unless the formatter is fully seated.
The heartbeat LED operates according to the product state. When the product is initializing, see
Heartbeat LED, product initialization on page 102 .
Heartbeat LED, product initialization
The following table describes the heartbeat LED operation while the product is executing the firmware boot process.
NOTE:
When the initialization process completes the heartbeat LED should be illuminated solid green
—the LED is off if the product is in Sleep Mode.
Table 2-8 Heartbeat LED, product initialization
Product initializing state
Heartbeat LED, normal state
No power (power cable disconnected or power switch off)
Power on (immediately after the power switch pressed)
Off
Red, solid
●
Duration should be 1 second or less
Heartbeat LED, error state
Not applicable
Serial peripheral interface (SPI) flash memory boot
HW checks on board
DRAM
Green, solid
Green, solid
Red, solid
●
Firmware error; problem finding hardware and booting the serial peripheral interface flash memory
◦
Boot process halted
Replace the formatter.
Red, solid
●
Firmware error; problem corrupt or missing
SPI flash memory
◦
Boot process halted
Replace the formatter.
Red, solid
●
Power on self check failure
◦
Boot process halted
Replace the formatter.
102 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
ENWW
Table 2-8 Heartbeat LED, product initialization (continued)
Product initializing state
Heartbeat LED, normal state Heartbeat LED, error state
Control panel connection initializes
Preboot menu available
(including diagnostics)
Accessing disk for firmware image
Green, solid
NOTE:
Control panel communication successful. If an error occurs, a message should appear on the control-panel display.
Green, solid
Yellow, fast flash
●
Formatter to control panel connection failed
◦
Boot process continues
Check the cables between the formatter and control panel for damage. Make sure that the cables are fully seated.
Red, solid
● Diagnostic failure
◦
Follow diagnostic instructions
Turn the power off, and then on again to restart the initialization process.
Yellow, fast flash
●
Control panel not connected
Firmware boot
Product operational
49.xx.yy
Green, solid
NOTE:
If applicable, disk error messages appear on the control-panel display.
Green, solid
NOTE:
If applicable, error messages appear on the control-panel display.
Green, heartbeat blink
NOTE:
If applicable, error messages appear on the control-panel display.
Not applicable
Yellow, fast flash
●
Control panel not connected
Yellow, fast flash
●
Control panel not connected
Control panel connection interrupted after the product is operational
Sleep Mode
Approaching Sleep
Mode
Not applicable
Green, slow blink
Green, slow blink
LED off
NOTE:
An error message (for example,
49.xx.yy) might appear on the control-panel display.
Eventually a formatter connection missing message will appear.
Turn the power off, and then on again to restart the initialization process.
If the error persists, perform a firmware upgrade.
Yellow, fast flash
●
Control panel not connected
Not applicable
Not applicable
Tools for troubleshooting 103
Table 2-8 Heartbeat LED, product initialization (continued)
Product initializing state
Heartbeat LED, normal state Heartbeat LED, error state
Wake up from Sleep
Mode
Approaching wake up from Sleep Mode
Follows initialization progression.
Follows initialization progression.
Follows initialization progression.
Follows initialization progression.
HP Jetdirect LEDs
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has failed.
For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to manually configure the link settings on the embedded print server by using the product control-panel menus.
1.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Administration
●
Network Settings
●
Embedded Jetdirect Menu
●
Link Speed
3.
Select the appropriate link speed, and then press the OK button.
Engine diagnostics
The product contains extensive internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality, paper path, noise, assembly, and timing issues.
Engine-test button
To verify that the product engine is functioning, print an engine-test page.
104 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Print the engine test pages
NOTE:
A damaged formatter might interfere with the engine test. If the engine test page does not print, try removing the formatter and performing the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the problem is in the formatter, the control panel, or the cable that connects them together.
1.
On the rear cover, locate the port for the engine test button (callout 1) located below the rear pocket cover.
Figure 2-1
Locating the engine-test-page switch
1
NOTE:
Make sure you are not looking at the rear pocket cover release latch port to the right and above the engine test button port.
2.
Use a paper clip or very small screwdriver to press the engine test-page button.
The test page should have a series of horizontal lines. The test page prints from the last tray that the product used to print, unless the product has been turned off and then turned on again since the most recent print job. If the product has been turned off and then on again since the most recent print job, then the page will print from Tray 2. The product continuously prints test pages as long as the test-page switch is depressed. The product will not print a test page if it is in Sleep mode.
Print formatter test pages
If the engine test was successful with the formatter removed, reinstall the formatter and then print a configuration page to test the functionality of the formatter.
1.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Administration
●
Troubleshooting
●
Print Quality Pages
●
Print Fuser Test Page
3.
Select the Print item, and then press the OK button.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 105
Paper path test
This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of jams.
To isolate a problem, specify which input tray to use, specify whether to use the duplex path, and specify the number of copies to print. Multiple copies can be printed to help isolate intermittent problems. The following options become available after you start the diagnostic feature:
●
Print Test Page. Run the paper-path test from the default settings: Tray 2, no duplex, and one copy. To specify other settings, scroll down the menu and select the setting, and then scroll back up and select Print Test Page to start the test.
●
Source Tray. Select Tray 1, Tray 2, or the optional tray.
●
Output Bin. Select All bins, Face down, or Face up.
●
Test Duplex Path. Enable or disable two-sided printing.
●
Number of Copies. Set the numbers of copies to be printed; the choices are 1,10, 50, 100, or
500.
1.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Administration
●
Troubleshooting
●
Diagnostic Tests
●
Paper Path Test
3.
Select the paper-path test options for the test you want to run.
Paper path sensor tests
This test displays the status of each paper-path sensor and allows viewing of sensor status while printing internal pages.
1.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Administration
●
Troubleshooting
●
Diagnostic Tests
●
Paper Path Sensors
NOTE:
Exiting the Paper Path Sensors menu and then reentering it will clear the test values from the previous test.
106 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-9 Paper-path sensors
Sensor name Sensor number
Top of page sensor
Fuser output sensor
Fuser loop sensor
Duplexer refeed sensor
Duplexer switchback sensor
Output sensor
Tray 4 paper feed sensor
(if optional Tray 4 is installed)
SR9
SR12
SR 6
SR2
SR1
SR3
SR1
Replacement part number
Description
Top sensor PCA
Fuser output sensor PCA
Fuser loop sensor
Duplexer refeed sensor
Duplexer switchback sensor
Output sensor
Tray 4 feed sensor
Paper-path sensor test name
SR9 Top sensor
SR12 Fuser output sensor
SR6 Fuser loop 1 sensor
SR2 Duplexer Refeed
SR1 Duplexer switchback sensor
SR3 Output sensor
SR1 Tray 4 feed
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 107
Manual sensor tests
Performs tests to determine whether the paper-path sensors are operating correctly.
1.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Administration
●
Troubleshooting
●
Diagnostic Tests
●
Manual Sensor Test
Table 2-10 Manual sensor tests
Sensor or switch name
Sensor number
Replacement part number
Cartridge-door switch SW3 CN
Left door switch
Right door sensor
SW1
SR8
Cartridge install sensor SR1
CN
CN
CN
Description
Toner cartridge door switch
Left door open switch
Right door open sensor
Toner cartridge installed sensor
Paper-path sensor test name
SW3 Cartridge Door
SW1 Left Door
SR8 Right door
SR1 Cartridge install sensor
Top sensor
Fuser loop sensor
Fuser output sensor
Duplex refeed sensor
SR9
SR6
SR12
SR2
CN
CN
CN
CN
Top sensor PCA
Fuser loop sensor
Fuser output sensor
Sr9 Top Sensor
SR6 Fuser loop 1 sensor
SR12 Fuser output sensor
Duplexer refeed sensor SR2 Duplexer refeed
Testing of sensor
Open the cartridge door.
Open the left door.
Open the right door.
Open the cartridge door, and then remove the toner cartridge.
Open the cartridge door, remove the toner cartridge, raise the registration shutter, and then use a small flat-blade screwdriver to activate the sensor.
Open the cartridge door, remove the toner cartridge, and then press the sensor lever.
Open the left door, pull down the fuser shutter, and then use a screwdriver to activate the sensor.
Remove the duplexer, insert a sheet of paper so that it covers the refeed sensor, and then reinstall the duplexer.
108 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-10 Manual sensor tests (continued)
Sensor or switch name
Sensor number
Replacement part number
Duplex switchback sensor
SR1 CN
Tray 4 feed sensor
(Optional 500-sheet feeder only)
Output sensor
SR1
SR3
CN
CN
Description
Duplexer switchback sensor
Tray 4 feeder sensor
Output sensor
Paper-path sensor test name
SR1 Duplexer switchback sensor
SR1 Tray 4 feed
SR3 Output sensor
Testing of sensor
Remove the duplexer, insert a sheet of paper so that it covers the switchback sensor, and then reinstall the duplexer.
Open the lower right door, and use a small flat-blade screwdriver to activate the sensor.
Open the left door and press the sensor lever..
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 109
Cartridge door switch (SW3)
1.
Open the cartridge door to activate the sensor.
Figure 2-2
Test the cartridge door switch
2.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
3.
If there is no response, make sure that the sensor-actuator tab on the door is not damaged or missing.
If necessary, replace the cartridge-door switch.
110 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Left door switch (SW1)
1.
Open the left door, gently release the door arm and lower the door until it is fully open, and then use a small flat-blade screwdriver to activate the switch.
Figure 2-3
Test the left door switch
2.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
3.
If there is no response, make sure that the sensor-actuator tab on the door is not damaged or missing.
If necessary, replace the switch.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 111
Right door sensor (SR8)
1.
Open the right door, and then press the sensor.
2.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
3.
If there is no response, make sure that the sensor-actuator tab on the door is not damaged or missing.
If necessary, replace the sensor.
112 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Cartridge install sensor (SR1)
1.
Open the cartridge door, remove the print cartridge, and then activate the sensor on the left side of the cartridge cavity.
2.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
3.
If necessary, replace the sensor.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 113
Top (top-of-page) sensor (SR9)
1.
Open the cartridge door, and then remove the toner cartridge.
2.
Raise the registration shutter.
3.
Use a small screwdriver to activate the top sensor.
Figure 2-4
Test the top sensor
4.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
5.
If there is no response, replace the sensor.
114 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Fuser loop sensor (SR6)
1.
Open the cartridge door, and then remove the toner cartridge.
2.
Press the sensor lever to activate the sensor.
Figure 2-5
Fuser loop sensor
3.
Check the control-panel display for a sensor response.
4.
If there is no response, replace the sensor.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 115
Fuser output sensor (SR12)
1.
Open the left door.
2.
Pull down the fuser shutter, and then use a small flat-blade screwdriver to pull the sensor lever toward you.
Figure 2-6
Fuser output sensor
3.
Check the control-panel display for a sensor response.
4.
If there is no response, replace the fuser.
116 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Duplex switchback sensor (SR1)
1.
Remove the duplexer from the product.
2.
Insert a sheet of paper in the duplexer until the sheet covers the sensor.
Figure 2-7
Duplex switchback sensor
3.
Reinstall the duplexer, and then check the control-panel display for sensor response.
4.
If there is no response, replace the duplexer.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 117
Duplexer refeed sensor (SR2)
1.
Remove the duplexer from the product.
2.
Insert a sheet of paper in the duplexer until the sheet covers the sensor.
Figure 2-8
Duplexer refeed sensor
3.
Reinstall the duplexer, and then check the control-panel display for sensor response.
4.
If there is no response, replace the duplexer.
118 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Tray 4 feed sensor (SR1)
1.
Open the lower right door.
2.
Use a small flatblade screwdriver to activate the sensor.
Figure 2-9
Tray 4 feed sensor
3.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
4.
If there is no response, replace the optional Tray 4 assembly.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 119
Output sensor (SR3)
1.
Open the left door, and then press the output sensor lever.
Figure 2-10
Output sensor
2.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
3.
If there is no response, replace the paper delivery assembly.
120 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Tray/bin manual sensor tests
Use this test to test paper-path sensors and the paper-size switches manually. The following illustrations and table show the locations of these sensors.
1.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Administration
●
Troubleshooting
●
Diagnostic Tests
●
Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test
Table 2-11 Tray/bin manual sensor test
Sensor or switch name
Sensor number
Replacement part number
Description Paper-path sensor test name
Testing of sensor
Multipurpose tray paper-presence sensor
Tray 2 paperpresence sensor
Tray 2 paper surface sensor
SR10
Tray 2 paper size switches
Tray 3 paperpresence sensor
SR1
SR7
SW 4,
SW6
SR5
Tray 3 paper surface sensor
SR11
CN
CN
CN
CN
CN
CN
Multipurpose tray paper-presence sensor
Tray 2 paperpresence sensor
Tray 2 paper surface sensor
Tray 2 paper size sensor
Tray 3 paperpresence sensor
Tray 3 feeder unit
SR1 Tray 1 paper
SR7 Tray 2 paper
SR10 Tray 2 paper surface
SW4, 6 Tray 2
Paper Size
SR5 Tray 3 paper
SR11 Tray 3 paper surface
Push the sensor lever and hold it there for
3 seconds.
Remove Tray 2 and
Tray 3, and then push the sensor lever on the right side of the tray cavity.
Remove Tray 2 and
Tray 3, and then push the sensor at the back of the tray cavity.
Remove Tray 2 and
Tray 3, and then push the switches at the back of the tray cavity.
Remove Tray 2 and
Tray 3, and then push the sensor lever on the right side of the tray cavity.
Remove Tray 2 and
Tray 3, and then push the sensor at the back of the tray cavity.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 121
Table 2-11 Tray/bin manual sensor test (continued)
Sensor or switch name
Tray 3 paper size switches
Tray 4 paperpresence sensor
Tray 4 paper surface sensor
SR2
Tray 4 paper size switches
Tray 4 feed sensor
Lower right door switch
Sensor number
SW5,
SW7
SR3
SW2,
SW3
SR1
SW1
Output bin full sensor SR4
Replacement part number
CN
CN
CN
CN
CN
CN
CN
Description
Tray 3 paper size switches
Tray 4 paperpresence sensor
Tray 4 paper surface sensor
Tray 4 paper size switches
Tray 4 feed sensor
Lower right door switch
Output bin full sensor
Paper-path sensor test name
Testing of sensor
SW5, 7 Tray 3
Paper Size
SR3 Tray 4 paper
SR2 Tray 4 paper surface
SW2, 3 Tray 4
Paper Size
SR1 Tray 4 feed
SW1 Lower right door 1 sensor
SR4 Output Bin Full
Remove Tray 2 and
Tray 3, and then push the switches at the back of the tray cavity.
Remove Tray 4, and then push the sensor lever.
Remove Tray 4, and then push the sensor at the back of the tray cavity.
Remove Tray 4, and then push the switches at the back of the tray cavity.
Open the lower right door, and then activate the feed sensor with a small flat-blade screwdriver.
Open the lower right door, and then activate the door switch with a small flat-blade screwdriver.
Lift the output bin sensor levers.
122 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Main product trays
Tray 1 paper sensor (SR1)
1.
Open Tray 1, push the sensor lever down, and hold it for 3 seconds to activate the sensor.
Figure 2-11
Tray 1 paper sensor
2.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
3.
If there is no response, replace the cartridge door assembly.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 123
Tray 2 Paper sensor (SR7)
1.
Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3, and then push the sensor levers on the right side of the cavity to activate the sensor.
Figure 2-12
Tray 2 paper sensor
2.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
3.
If there is no response, replace the upper cassette pickup assembly.
124 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Tray 2 paper surface sensor (SR10)
1.
Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3, and then push the sensor at the back of the tray cavity.
Figure 2-13
Tray 2 paper surface sensor
2.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
3.
If there is no response, replace the lifter drive assembly.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 125
Tray 2 paper size switches (SW4, SW6)
1.
Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3, and then push the switches at the back of the tray cavity.
Figure 2-14
Tray 2 paper size switches
2.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
3.
If there is no response, replace the lifter drive assembly.
126 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Tray 3 paper sensor (SR5)
1.
Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3, and then push the sensor lever on the right side of the cavity to activate the sensor.
Figure 2-15
Tray 3 paper sensor
2.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
3.
If there is no response, replace the lower cassette pickup assembly.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 127
Tray 3 paper surface sensor (SR11)
1.
Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3, and then push the sensor at the back of the tray cavity.
Figure 2-16
Tray 3 paper surface sensor
2.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
3.
If there is no response, replace the lifter drive assembly.
128 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Tray 3 paper size switches (SW5, SW7)
1.
Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3, and then push the switches at the back of the tray cavity.
Figure 2-17
Tray 3 paper size switches
2.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
3.
If there is no response, replace the lifter drive assembly.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 129
Output bin full sensor (SR4)
1.
Raise and then lower the output-bin levers to activate the sensor.
Figure 2-18
Output bin full sensor
2.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
3.
If there is no response, replace the top-cover flag or the photo interrupter.
130 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Optional 500-sheet paper tray (Tray 4)
Tray 4 paper sensor (SR3)
1.
Remove the Tray 4 cassette, and then push the sensor lever on the right side of the cavity to activate the sensor.
Figure 2-19
Tray 4 paper sensor
2.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
3.
If there is no response, replace the optional 500-sheet feeder.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 131
Tray 4 paper surface (SR2)
1.
Remove Tray 4, and then press the sensor lever in the back right corner of the tray cavity to activate the sensor.
Figure 2-20
Tray 4 paper surface sensor
2.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
3.
If there is no response, replace the optional 500-sheet feeder.
132 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Tray 4 paper size switches (SW2, SW3)
1.
Remove Tray 4, and then push the switches at the back of the tray cavity.
Figure 2-21
Tray 4 paper size switches
2.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
3.
If there is no response, replace the optional 500-sheet feeder.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 133
Tray 4 Feed sensor (SR1)
1.
Open the lower right door.
2.
Use a small flatblade screwdriver to activate the sensor.
Figure 2-22
Tray 4 feed sensor
3.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
4.
If there is no response, replace the optional Tray 4 assembly.
134 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Lower right door sensor (SW1)
1.
Open the lower right door, and then use a small screwdriver to activate the sensor.
Figure 2-23
Lower right door sensor
2.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
3.
If there is no response, replace the optional 500-sheet paper tray assembly.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 135
1x500 and 3x500 paper deck trays
Tray 4 paper sensor (SR3)
See Tray 4 paper sensor (SR3) on page 131 .
Tray 4 paper surface sensor (SR2)
See Tray 4 paper surface (SR2) on page 132
.
Tray 4 paper size switches (SW2, SW3)
See Tray 4 paper size switches (SW2, SW3) on page 133
.
Tray 4 feed sensor (SR1)
See Tray 4 Feed sensor (SR1) on page 134 .
Tray 4 door opening/closing door switch (SW1)
NOTE:
Tray 4, Tray 5, and Tray 6 use the same door switch (SW1).
1.
Open and then close the paper-feeder door to ensure that the tab on the door (callout 1) activates the switch (callout 2).
Figure 2-24
Test the Tray 4 door switch
2
1
2.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
3.
If no response, replace the button switch.
136 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Tray 5 paper sensor (SR83)
See
Tray 4 paper sensor (SR3) on page 131 .
Tray 5 paper surface sensor (SR82)
See
Tray 4 paper surface (SR2) on page 132 .
Tray 5 paper size switches (SW82, SW83)
See
Tray 4 paper size switches (SW2, SW3) on page 133
.
Tray 5 feed sensor (SR81)
See
Tray 4 Feed sensor (SR1) on page 134 .
Tray 5 door opening/closing switch (SW1)
See
Tray 4 door opening/closing door switch (SW1) on page 136 .
Tray 6 paper sensor (SR93)
See
Tray 4 paper sensor (SR3) on page 131 .
Tray 6 paper surface sensor (SR92)
See
Tray 4 paper surface (SR2) on page 132 .
Tray 6 paper size switches (SW92, SW93)
See
Tray 4 paper size switches (SW2, SW3) on page 133
.
Tray 6 feed sensor (SR91)
See
Tray 4 Feed sensor (SR1) on page 134 .
Tray 6 door opening/closing switch (SW1)
See
Tray 4 door opening/closing door switch (SW1) on page 136 .
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 137
HCI trays
NOTE:
For the purposes of this section, the tray numbers reflect a base unit with the HCI installed. If your product has an optional 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 4) installed, the tray numbers in this section will differ. In this section, Tray 4 refers to the right tray, and Tray 5 refers to the left tray.
Tray 4 paper sensor (PS3103)
1.
Remove Tray 4 from the HCI.
2.
In the tray cavity, press and hold the tray presence switch (callout 1), and then lift the paper sensor lever (callout 2).
Figure 2-25
Tray 4 paper sensor
2
1
3.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
4.
If there is no response, replace the sensor.
Tray 4 paper surface sensor (PS3101 and PS3102)
1.
Remove Tray 4 from the HCI.
138 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
2.
In the tray cavity, in the upper right-hand corner, toggle the sensor lever.
Figure 2-26
Tray 4 paper surface sensor
3.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
4.
If there is no response, replace the sensor.
Tray 4 paper size sensor (PS3303)
1.
Remove Tray 4 from the HCI.
2.
In the tray cavity, press and hold the tray presence switch (callout 1), and then lift the paper size sensor lever (callout 2).
Figure 2-27
Tray 4 paper size sensor
1
2
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 139
3.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
4.
If there is no response, replace the sensor.
Tray 4 paper feed sensor (PS3302)
1.
Remove Tray 4 from the HCI.
2.
Place a business card between the feed roller and the separation roller as far as it will go to activate the feed sensor.
Figure 2-28
Tray 4 paper feed sensor
3.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
4.
If there is no response, replace the sensor.
Tray 4 door open sensor (SW3301)
1.
Open the HCI right door.
140 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
2.
Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to activate the door sensor.
Figure 2-29
Tray 4 door open sensor
3.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
4.
If there is no response, replace the sensor.
Tray 5 paper sensor (PS3203)
1.
Remove Tray 5 from the HCI.
2.
In the tray cavity, press and hold the tray presence switch (callout 1), and then lift the paper sensor lever (callout 2).
Figure 2-30
Tray 5 paper sensor
2
1
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 141
3.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
4.
If there is no response, replace the sensor.
Tray paper surface sensor (PS3201 and PS3202)
1.
Remove Tray 5 from the HCI.
2.
At the back of the tray cavity, toggle the sensor lever.
Figure 2-31
Tray paper surface sensor
3.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
4.
If there is no response, replace the sensor.
Tray 5 paper size sensor (PS3304)
1.
Remove Tray 5 from the HCI.
142 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
2.
In the tray cavity, press and hold the tray presence switch (callout 1), and then lift the paper size sensor lever (callout 2).
Figure 2-32
Tray 5 paper size sensor
1
2
3.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
4.
If there is no response, replace the sensor.
Tray 5 feed sensor (PS3305)
1.
Remove Tray 5 from the HCI.
2.
Place a business card between the feed roller and the separation roller as far as it will go to activate the feed sensor.
Figure 2-33
Tray 5 feed sensor
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 143
3.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
4.
If there is no response, replace the sensor.
HCI exit sensor (PS3301)
1.
Open the HCI right door.
2.
Lift the jam access flap (callout 1), and then use a small flat-blade screwdriver to lift the sensor lever (callout 2).
Figure 2-34
HCI exit sensor
1
2
3.
Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
4.
If there is no response, replace the sensor.
Print/stop test
Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image-formation defects and jams within the engine. During this test you can stop the paper anywhere along the product paper path. The test can be programmed to stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position. The test can also be programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 ms. If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the job-print time, you can recover the product in one of two ways.
1.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Administration
●
Troubleshooting
●
Diagnostic Tests
144 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
3.
Scroll to the Print/Stop Test item, and then press the OK button .
4.
Enter a range, and then pess the OK button.
●
After the print job is completed, press the OK button to return to the Troubleshooting menu before the timer times out.
●
After the timer times out, press the Stop button. Activate the door switch to restart the engine and return it to a normal state.
NOTE:
Do not try to perform a print/stop test while the product is calibrating, because you might be required to restart the product. If a jam message displays on the control panel during testing, activate the door switch.
Component tests
Control-panel tests
Open the following menus:
●
Administration
●
Troubleshooting
●
Diagnostic Tests
Available control-panel tests
●
LEDs: test the LEDs on the control panel.
●
Display: sequence through display tests.
●
Buttons: tests the key pad and other buttons.
Half self-test
Perform a half self-test to determine which image-formation process might be malfunctioning.
NOTE:
It might be easier to perform the print/stop test to stop the product during the printing process.
See
.
1.
Print a configuration page from the control panel.
2.
Open the cartridge door after the paper advances half-way through the product, which is about 3 to 5 seconds after the main motor begins to rotate. The leading edge of the paper should have advanced past the toner cartridge.
3.
Remove the toner cartridge.
4.
Open the toner cartridge drum shield to view the drum surface.
If a dark and distinct toner image is present on the drum surface, assume that the cleaning, conditioning, writing, and developing functions of the electrophotographic process are functioning correctly. Troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing problem. If no image is present on the drum, perform the drum rotation test check. See
Drum rotation test check on page 146
.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 145
Drum rotation test check
NOTE:
This test is especially important if refilled toner cartridges are in use.
The photosensitive drum, which is located in the toner cartridge, must rotate in order for the print process to work. The photosensitive drum receives its drive from the main gear assembly. Use this procedure to determine whether the drum is rotating.
1.
Open the cartridge door.
2.
Remove the toner cartridge.
3.
Mark the cartridge drive gear with a felt-tipped marker. Note the position of the mark.
4.
Install the toner cartridge, and then close the cartridge door. The start-up sequence should rotate the drum enough to move the mark on the gear.
5.
Open the product and inspect the mark on the cartridge drive gear.
Verify that the mark moved. If there was no movement, inspect the main gear assembly to make sure that it connects with the toner-cartridge gears. If the drive gears function but the drum does not move, replace the toner cartridge.
Component test (special-mode test)
This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems.
Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly. If you turn on the Repeat option from the drop-down menu, the test cycles the component on and off. This process continues for two minutes, and then the test terminates.
1.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Administration
●
Troubleshooting
●
Diagnostic Tests
●
Component Test
3.
Select the component test options for the test you want to run.
Table 2-12 Component tests
Component test Item Description
Main motor test
Fuser motor test
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup solenoid test
M8001
M8002
SL1
Control-panel display message
Drum Motor
Fuser Motor
Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid
Activates the main motor for 10 seconds.
Activates the fuser motor for 10 seconds.
Activates the Tray 1 pickup solenoid for 10 seconds.
146 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-12 Component tests (continued)
Component test Item Control-panel display message
Tray 2 pickup solenoid test SL2 Tray 2 Pickup Solenoid
Clutch drive test CL1 Feed Roller Clutch
Scanner motor test
Tray 3 pickup solenoid test
Not applicabl e
SL3
Laser Scanner Motor
Tray 3 Pickup Solenoid
Tray 4 Pickup Solenoid Tray 4 pickup solenoid test SL3
1
Tray 3 and Tray 4 both use an SL3.
Description
Activates the Tray 3 cassette pickup solenoid for 10 seconds.
Activates the main motor to activate the paper feeder pickup clutch for 10 seconds.
Activates the laser scanner motor for 10 seconds.
Activates the Tray 4 cassette pickup solenoid for 10 seconds.
Activates the Tray 4 cassette pickup solenoid for 10 seconds.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 147
Diagrams
Block diagrams
Figure 2-35
Product cross section
1 2 3 4 5
15
5
6
3
4
1
2
7
8
14 13 12
Table 2-13 Product cross section
Item Description
11
Laser scanner
Photosensitive drum
Toner cartridge
Registration roller
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup roller
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) separation pad
Cassette separation roller
Cassette pickup roller
10
11
12
13
14
15
Item
9
10
9
Description
Transfer roller
Fuser film
Pressure roller
Fuser output roller
Upper cassette
Lower cassette
Output roller
8
148 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
6
7
Figure 2-36
Optional paper feeder (Tray 4) cross section
1 2
1
2
4
Table 2-14 Optional paper feeder (Tray 4) cross section
Item Description Item
3
Description
Pickup roller
Feed roller
3
4
Separation roller
Cassette
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 149
Figure 2-37
1x500-sheet paper deck cross section
1 2
1
2
3
5 4
Table 2-15 1x500-sheet paper deck cross section
Item Description Item
Pickup roller
Feed roller
Separation roller
4
5
3
Description
Storage box
Cassette
150 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Figure 2-38
3x500-sheet paper deck cross section
1 2
ENWW
1
2
4
Table 2-16 3x500-sheet paper deck cross section
Item Description Item
Pickup roller
Feed roller
3
4
3
Description
Separation roller
Cassette
Tools for troubleshooting 151
Figure 2-39
3,500-sheet HCI cross section
1 2
1
2
3
5
Table 2-17 3,500-sheet HCI cross section
4
Item Description
Pickup roller
Feed roller
Separation roller
Item
4
5
3
Description
Right cassette
Left cassette
152 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Location of connectors
DC controller connections
Figure 2-40
DC controller connections
J53
J54 J63 J34 J74 J45
J51
J37
J61
J62
J48
J49 J41
J43 J44 J52 J46
Table 2-18 DC controller connections
Item Description Item
J31 Low-voltage power supply
J44
J32
J33 J71 J47
J36
J73
J35
Description
Right door sensor
Item
J53
J32
J31
Description
Upper cassette media end switch
Lower cassette media end switch
Input accessory
J33
J34
J35
J36
Low-voltage power supply
J45
Rear fan
Power switch
J46
J47
Left door interlock switch
J48
Cartridge door interlock switch
J49
Output sensor
Output bin media full sensor
Drum motor
J54
J61
Fuser motor J62
Upper cassette media out sensor
Upper cassette pickup clutch
Tray 1
(multipurpose tray) pickup solenoid
J63
J71
High-voltage power supply
High-voltage power supply
Environment sensor
Laser scanner
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 153
Table 2-18 DC controller connections (continued)
Item Description Item Description
J37 J51
J41
Cartridge presence sensor
Front fan
Scanner motor
Fuser fan
Tray 1
(multipurpose tray) media out sensor
J52
Upper cassette lifter motor
Lower cassette lifter motor
Upper cassette lift up sensor
Lower cassette liftup sensor
Upper cassette media width switch
Lower cassette media width switch
Duplexer
Item
J73
J74
J43 Lower cassette media out sensor
Lower cassette pickup clutch
Description
Connector PCA
Cartridge memory tag
Cartridge door switch
154 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Plug/jack locations
ENWW
1
2
3
Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port
Host USB port (for connecting third-party devices)
Tools for troubleshooting 155
Locations of major components
Figure 2-41
External component locations
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Table 2-20 External component locations
Item Description
5
6
3
4
1
2
7
8
9
10
Top rear cover
Face-down cover
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) cover
Right rear cover
Right door
Right handle cover
Front right lower cover
Left upper cover
Left door
Left inner front cover
Item
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Description
Left inner lower cover
Front left lower cover
Left handle cover
Duplex blanking cover
Rear cover
Rear pocket cover
Front cover
Face-down upper cover
Face-down side cover
Control panel
156 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Table 2-20 External component locations (continued)
Item Description Item
11 Left inner upper cover 23
12 Left inner rear cover 24
Description
HIP cover
Top cover
Figure 2-42
Major component locations (1 of 3)
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
ENWW
1
2
3
4
Table 2-21 Major component locations (1 of 3)
Item Description Item
Output assembly
Feed assembly
Registration assembly
Upper cassette pickup assembly
5
6
7
Description
Lower cassette pickup assembly
Cartridge door
Fuser
Tools for troubleshooting 157
Figure 2-43
Major component locations (2 of 3)
4
1
2
Table 2-22 Major component locations (2 of 3)
Item Description Item
Laser scanner
Main drive assembly
3
4
Description
Lifter drive assembly
Fuser drive assembly
Figure 2-44
Major component locations (3 of 3)
1
2
3
1
Table 2-23 Major component locations (3 of 3)
Item Description
1 Formatter
158 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Figure 2-45
PCA locations
1
2
3
ENWW
5
1
2
3
Table 2-24 PCA locations
Item Description
Low-voltage power supply
DC controller PCA
High-voltage power supply
Item
4
5
Description
USB PCA
Connector PCA
4
Tools for troubleshooting 159
Figure 2-46
Motor locations
1
2
5
1
2
3
Table 2-25 Motor locations
4
Item Description
Scanner motor
Drum motor
Upper cassette lifter motor
Figure 2-47
Fan locations
3
Item
4
5
Description
Lower cassette lifter motor
Fuser motor
1
3
1
2
Table 2-26 Fan locations
Item Description
Rear fan
Front fan
160 Chapter 2 Solve problems
2
Item
3
Description
Fuser fan
ENWW
ENWW
Figure 2-48
Roller locations
7
6
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Table 2-27 Roller locations
Item Description
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup roller
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) separation pad
Upper cassette separation roller
Lower cassette separation roller
6
7
Item
5
Description
Upper cassette pickup roller
Lower cassette pickup roller
Transfer roller
Tools for troubleshooting 161
Figure 2-49
500-sheet feeder external component locations
7
6
1
2
3
5
3
4
1
2
Table 2-28 500-sheet feeder external component locations
Item Description Item Description
Right door
Right front cover
Right lower cover
Left cover
5
6
7
Rear cover
Cassette
Front upper cover
4
162 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
ENWW
Figure 2-50
500-sheet feeder internal component locations
7
6
5
1
2
1
2
3
4
Table 2-29 500-sheet feeder internal component locations
Item Description Item Description
Pickup motor
Lifter drive
Controller PCA
Pickup assembly
5
6
7
Separation roller
Feed roller
Pickup roller
3
4
Tools for troubleshooting 163
Figure 2-51
1x500 paper deck external component locations
11
10
9
8
1
2
3
7
6
1
4
5
2
3
6
Table 2-30 1x500 paper deck external component locations
Item Description Item Description
Right door
Right front cover
Right lower cover
Left cover
Left lower cover
Rear lower cover
7
8
9
10
11
Rear cover
Front lower cover
Front door
Cassette
Front upper cover
164 Chapter 2 Solve problems
4
5
ENWW
Figure 2-52
1x500 paper deck internal component locations
1 2 3
4
5
6
7
8
ENWW
3
4
1
2
Table 2-31 1x500 paper deck internal component locations
Item Description Item Description
Separation roller
Pickup roller
Feed roller
Pickup motor
7
8
5
6
Lifter drive assembly
Controller PCA
Cassette pickup assembly
Storage box
Tools for troubleshooting 165
Figure 2-53
3x500 paper deck external component locations
10
9
8
1
2
3
7
6
3
4
1
2
5
Table 2-32 3x500 paper deck external component locations
Item Description Item Description
Right door
Right front cover
Right lower cover
Left cover
Left lower cover
8
9
6
7
10
Rear lower cover
Rear cover
Front lower cover
Cassette
Front upper cover
166 Chapter 2 Solve problems
4
5
ENWW
Figure 2-54
3x500 paper deck internal component locations
1 2 3
4
5
6
ENWW
7
1
2
3
4
Table 2-33 3x500 paper deck internal component locations
Item Description Item Description
Separation roller
Pickup roller
Feed roller
Pickup motor
5
6
7
Lifter drive assembly
Controller PCA
Cassette pickup assembly
Tools for troubleshooting 167
Figure 2-55
HCI external component locations
11
10
1
2
3
4
5
9
8
4
5
6
1
2
3
Table 2-34 HCI external component locations
Item Description Item
Right door
Right rear cover
Right center cover
Right front cover
Right lower cover
Left cover
7
8
9
10
11
Description
Left lower cover
Rear lower cover
Rear cover
Right cassette
Left cassette
168 Chapter 2 Solve problems
6
7
ENWW
Figure 2-56
HCI internal component locations (1 of 2)
1
2
3
4
ENWW
1
2
Table 2-35 HCI internal component locations (1 of 2)
Item Description Item
Left pickup assembly
Right pickup assembly
3
4
Description
Controller PCA
Merge assembly
Tools for troubleshooting 169
Figure 2-57
HCI internal component locations (2 of 2)
1 2 3 4
8
7
5
6
3
4
1
2
Table 2-36 HCI internal component locations (2 of 2)
Item Description Item
Left cassette pickup drive
Left cassette pickup motor
Right cassette pickup drive
Right cassette pickup motor
7
8
5
6
Description
Right cassette lifter drive assembly
Right cassette automatic close assembly
Left cassette automatic close assembly
Left cassette lifter drive assembly
170 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
General timing charts
Figure 2-58
General timing chart
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 171
Circuit diagrams
Figure 2-59
General circuit diagram (1 of 2)
1 2 3
J4(P)
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TB102
TB101
1
2
3
J3
2 1
2 1
1
1
SR6
3
3
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
Fusing motor (M3)
Main switch
GND
/PWRSW
PWRLED
+24V
/SMACC
/SMDEC
GND
GND
FAN2DR
FAN2LK
GND
/CRGS
SNS3.3
FAN3DR
FAN3LK
GND
GND
/FMACC
/FMDEC
/FMFGI
+24VC
ENVTEMP
GND
ENVHUM
+3.3VC
+5V
GND
GND
VDO1
/VDO1
/VDO2
GND
CNT1
CNT2
GND
VDO2
GND
CNT0
PDOUT
/SM_BDI
4 3 2 1
J31
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J32
GND
CRGDSW
+24VB
+24VC
CLKB
CLKA
DELS
GND
SNS3.3
FULLS
GND
SNS3.3
+24VD
+24VC
+24VB
MPTSL
SNS3.3
GND
RIGHTDSNS
K 1L
GND
FAN
FAN1DR
DPX_TMG
DPX_EXST
DPX CMD
DPX CLK
DPX STS
+24VB
GND
3
4
5
6
7
2
1
/DMACC
GND
/DMDEC
/DMFGI
+24VB
Drum motor (M1)
GND
/MPTS
SNS3.3
UCSTS
GND
SNS3.3
UCST_CL
+24VB
+24VB
LCST_CL
GND
SNS3.3
LCSTS
TRFVS
RLD
+3.3VC
+3.3VC
+3.3VD
FSRCUR
/FDOFF
/LOOPS
+24VD
+24VD
+24VD
+24VD
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
TRMCLK
DISCLK
/TOP_IN
PRIDCCLK
TRFCLK
TRFVCNT
DISVCNT
S1
S2 TON
TON
FSRD2
S2FSRTH
MFSRTH
S1FSRTH
S3FSRTH
/MTRSTOP
FSROUTS
FSRD1
GND
/ZEROX
FSRTHLOW
DEVACCNT
DEVACCLK
PRIACCNT
PRIDCCNT
PRIACCLK
DEVDCCNT
PRIACVPS
PRIACVDS
1
1
2
2
4 3 2 1
B10
4 3 2 1
B10 A10
A10
J1LB
J1LA
J1LWH
J1DWH
J1DA
J1DB
1 2
J903
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
FDR_CMD
FDR_CLK
FDR_STS
GND
GND
+24VB
+24VB
3
4
1
2
5
1
2
3
4
SNS3.3
GND
UCST_LUPS
SNS3.3
GND
GND
/LCST SIZE3
N.C
/LCST SIZE4
N.C
/UCST SIZE3
/UCST SIZE4
GND
/LCST SIZE2
GND
/LCST SIZE1
/LCST SIZE0
GND
/UCST SIZE1
/UCST SIZE0
/UCST SIZE2
LCST_LUPS
L_LMTRDR2
L_LMTRDR1
U_LMTRDR2
U_LMTRDR1
Paper deck (accessory)
172 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
ENWW
Figure 2-60
General circuit diagram (2 of 2)
5
Hardware integration
4 3 2
J9
1
J2
1 2 3 4 5
GNDC
FG
USB_D+
USB_D-
USB_PWR_5V
FPO_CCPI
FPI_CCPI
KEYS_CCPI
GND
FG
GND
5V_CCPI
/FPCS_CCPI
FPCLK_CCPI
+3.3V_from_FMTR
+3.3V A
+3.3VA
+3.3V A
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
COME2C
COMC2E
WAKE_ENG
WAKE_VC
/TOPOUT
GND
GND
/VDOEN
GND
GND
/VCRSET
MFP
GND
/VDO1
GND
VDO1
/VDO2
GND
VDO2
GND
/BDOUT
N.C
GND
/TESTPSW
/RMT_3.3VB
USB_D-
USB_D+
USB_PWR_5V
USB_PWR_5V
3.3VB
3.3VB
3.3VB
5V
5V
5V
5V
3.3VB
3.3VB
3.3VB
WAKE_VC
/TOPOUT
WAKE_ENG
/VCRSET
5V_CCPI
/VDOEN
COME2C
COMC2E
GND
/BDOUT
GND(MFP)
/FPCS_CCPI
FPCLK_CCPI
FPO_CCPI
FPI_CCPI
KEYS_CCPI
VDO1
GND
/VDO2
/VDO1
SCL
SDA
5V
5V
5V
RTC3.3V
GND
VDO2
GND
3.3VB
3.3VB
+3.3V_from_FMTR
+3.3V_from_FMTR
A48
A49
A47
A36
A37
A38
A39
A35
A40
A41
A42
A43
A45
A46
A44
B14
B16
B18
B20
B2
B3
B1
B8
B9
B4
B12
B31
B32
B22
B33
B34
B35
B36
B38
B39
B37
B40
B41
B42
B43
B45
B46
B44
B48
B49
B47
B8
B9
B4
B2
B1
B3
B12
B14
B16
B18
B20
B31
B32
B22
B33
B34
B35
B36
B38
B39
B37
B40
B41
B42
B43
B45
B46
B44
B48
B49
B47
A38
A39
A37
A36
A35
A40
A41
A42
A43
A45
A46
A44
A48
A49
A47
Tools for troubleshooting 173
Internal test pages
Clean the paper path
1.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Device Maintenance
●
Calibration/Cleaning
●
Print Cleaning Page
3.
The cleaning process can take several minutes. When it is finished, discard the printed page.
Set up an auto cleaning page
Use the procedure in this section to set up an automatic cleaning page.
1.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Device Maintenance
●
Calibration/Cleaning
●
Auto Cleaning
3.
Select the Enabled item, and then press the OK button.
4.
Scroll to the Cleaning Interval option, and then press the OK button.
5.
Scroll to the correct interval value, and then press the OK button.
6.
Scroll to the Auto Cleaning Size option, and then press the OK button.
7.
Scroll to the correct paper size option, and then press the OK button.
8.
Press the Home button to return the product to the ready state.
174 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Print a configuration page
Depending on the model, up to three pages print when you print a configuration page. In addition to the main configuration page, the embedded Jetdirect configuration pages print.
Configuration page
Use the configuration page to view current product settings, to help troubleshoot product problems, or to verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and product languages.
1.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Administration
●
Reports
●
Configuration/Status Pages
3.
Scroll to the Configuration Page item, and then press the OK button.
4.
Scroll to the Print item, and then press the OK button to print the pages.
Figure 2-61
Configuration page
1
Configuration Page
2
1
4
5
2
3
6
7
Device information
Installed personalities and options
HP Web services
Memory
Event log
Security
Paper trays and options
3
4
5
6
7
Page 1
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 175
HP embedded Jetdirect page
The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page, which contains the following information:
Always make sure the status line under the general information line indicates "I/O Card Ready."
Figure 2-62
HP embedded Jetdirect page
1
Embedded Jetdirect Page
4
Page 1
2
3
5
6
2
3
1
4
5
6
General Information indicates the product status, model number, hardware firmware version, port select, port configuration, auto negotiation, manufacturing identification, and manufactured date.
Security Settings information
Network Statistics indicates the total packets received, unicast packets received, bad packets received, framing errors received, total packets transmitted, unsendable packets, transmit collisions, and transmit late collisions.
TCP/IP information, including the IP address
IPv4 information
IPv6 information
176 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Finding important information on the configuration pages
Certain information, such as the firmware date codes, the IP address, and the e-mail gateways, is especially helpful while servicing the product. This information is on the various configuration pages.
Table 2-37 Important information on the configuration pages
Type of information Specific information
DC controller
Firmware date codes
When you use the remote firmware upgrade procedure, all of these firmware components are upgraded.
Firmware datecode
Embedded Jetdirect firmware version
Accessories and internal storage
All optional devices that are installed on the product should be listed on the main configuration page.
External disk (optional)
Embedded HP Jetdirect
In addition, separate pages print for the optional paper handling devices. These pages list more-detailed information for those devices.
Total RAM
Duplex unit
Additional 500-sheet feeders Additional 500-sheet feeders
Engine cycles
Configuration page
Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.”
Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.”
Look on the embedded Jetdirect page, under “General Information.”
Look on the main configuration page, under “Installed Personalities and
Options.” Shows model and capacity.
Look on the main configuration page, under “Installed Personalities and
Options.” Shows model and ID.
Look on the main configuration page, under “Memory.”
Look on the main configuration page, under “Paper Trays and Options.”
Look on the main configuration page, under “Paper Trays and Options.”
Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.”
Engine cycles and event logs
Total page counts and maintenance kit counts are important for ongoing product maintenance.
The configuration page lists only the three most recent errors. To see a list of the 50 most recent errors, print an event log from the Diagnostics menu.
Event-log information Event-log information Look on the main configuration page, under “Event log.”
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 177
Control panel menus
Administration menu
You can perform basic product setup by using the Administration menu. Use the HP Embedded
Web Server for more advanced product setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the product IP address or host name in the address bar of a Web browser.
Reports menu
To display: At the product control panel, open the Administration menu, and then open the
Reports menu.
Table 2-38 Reports menu
First level Second level
Configuration/Status Pages Administration Menu Map
Current Settings Page
Configuration Page
Supplies Status Page
Values
View
View
View
View
Description
Shows a map of the entire
Administration menu and the selected values for each setting.
Print a summary of the current settings for the product. This might be helpful if you plan to make changes and need a record of the present configuration.
Shows the product settings and installed accessories.
Usage Page
File Directory Page
View
View
Shows the approximate remaining life for the supplies; reports statistics on total number of pages and jobs processed, serial number, page counts, and maintenance information.
HP provides approximations of the remaining life for the supplies as a customer convenience. The actual remaining supply levels might be different than the approximations provided.
Shows a count of all paper sizes that have passed through the product; lists whether they were simplex, duplex, monochrome, or color; and reports the page count.
Shows the file name and folder name for files that are stored in the product memory.
178 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-38 Reports menu (continued)
First level Second level
Web Services Status Page
Other Pages PCL Font List
PS Font List
Values
View
Description
Shows the detected Web
Services for the product.
Prints the available PCL fonts.
Prints the available PS fonts.
General Settings menu
To display: At the product control panel, open the Administration menu, and then open the
General Settings menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-39 General Settings menu
First level Second level Third level
Date/Time
Settings
Date/Time
Format
Date Format
Fourth level
Energy Settings
Date/Time
Sleep Timer
Settings
Time Format
Time Zone
Date
Time
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Sleep/Auto Off
Timer
Values Description
DD/MMM/YYYY
MMM/DD/YYYY
YYYY/MMM/DD
12 hour (AM/PM)
24 hours
Select the time zone from a list.
Select the date from a pop-up calendar.
Select the time from a pop-up keypad.
Checkbox
Use the Date/Time
Settings menu to specify the date and time and to configure date/time settings.
Select the format that the product uses to show the date and time, for example 12hour format or 24hour format.
Enabled*
Disabled
If you are in an area that uses daylight savings time, select the Adjust for
Daylight Savings
box.
Enable or disable the product sleep or auto off function.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 179
Table 2-39 General Settings menu (continued)
First level
Print Quality
Second level
Image
Registration
Third level
Sleep/Auto Off
After
Fourth level
Adjust Tray <X> Print Test Page
Values
Range: 1 to 120 minutes
Default = 60 minutes
Description
Set the number of minutes after which the product enters
Sleep or Auto Off mode. Use the arrow buttons on the control panel to increase or decrease the number of minutes.
Shift the margin alignment to center the image on the page from top to bottom and from left to right. You can also align the image on the front with the image printed on the back.
Use the Adjust
Tray <X> menu to adjust the registration settings for each tray.
Before adjusting these values, print a registration test page. It provides alignment guides in the X and Y directions so you can determine which adjustments are necessary. You can adjust values for X1
Shift, X2 Shift, Y1
Shift, and Y2 Shift.
Use the Print Test
Page option to print a page to test the image registration. It provides alignment guides in the X and Y directions so you can determine which adjustments are necessary.
180 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-39 General Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
Adjust Paper
Types
Select from a list of paper types that the product supports.
The available options are the same for each paper type.
Fourth level
X1 Shift
Y1 Shift
X2 Shift
Y2 Shift
Print Mode
Separation Mode
Values
-5.00 mm to 5.00
mm
Select from a list of print modes.
Normal*
Alternate
Description
The direction that is perpendicular to the way the paper passes through the product is referred to as X. This is also known as the scan direction. X1 is the scan direction for a single-sided page or for the second side of a two-sided page. X2 is the scan direction for the first side of a two-sided page.
The direction that the paper feeds through the product is referred to as Y. Y1 is the feed direction for a single-sided page or for the second side of a twosided page. Y2 is the feed direction for the first side of a twosided page.
Changing the Print
Mode setting is usually the first thing to try to resolve printquality problems.
Problems can include toner not sticking well to the page, a faint image of the page repeated on the same or following page, incorrect gloss level, etc.
Use the Alternate setting when you are having issues with light-weight paper during duplex print jobs.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 181
Table 2-39 General Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
Optimize
Resolution
Fourth level Values
Resistance Mode
Normal*
Up
Down
Description
Use this setting to correct print quality problems in lowhumidity environments and highly resistive paper. Use the Up option to solve print quality problems that are related to poor toner-transfer. Use the Down option in the event that small,
“pin-hole” defects occur.
Line Detail
Restore Optimize
Pre-Rotation
Mode
Off
On*
Fuser Temp Mode Up
Down
Normal*
Paper Curl Mode
Normal*
Alternate 1
Alternate 2
Alternate 3
Normal*
Alternate 1
Off
Use this feature to eliminate ghost images on printed pages.
Use this setting to reduce paper curl in print jobs.
600 x 600 dpi*
FastRes 1200
ProRes 1200
Use this setting if you are experiencing issues with scattered lines in printed pages.
Use to return all the settings in the
Optimize menu to the factory-default values.
Sets the resolution at which the product prints.
182 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-39 General Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
REt
Fourth level
Economode
Toner density
Values
On
Off
On
Off*
Range: 1 to 5
The default value is
3.
Description
Use this setting to enable or disable
Resolution
Enhancement technology (REt), which produces smoother angles, curves, and edges.
Use this setting to enable or disable the
Economode feature, which conserves toner.
Use this setting to increase or decrease the toner density on printed pages.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 183
Table 2-39 General Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
Jam Recovery
Fourth level
Auto Recovery
Manage Stored
Jobs
Sort Stored Jobs
By
Values
Auto*
Off
On
Enabled
Disabled*
Job Name*
Date
Description
This product provides a jam recovery feature that reprints jammed pages.
Select one of the following options:
Auto: The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. This is the default setting.
Off: The product does not attempt to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to store the most recent pages, performance is optimal.
NOTE:
When using this option, if the product runs out of paper and the job is being printed on both sides, some pages can be lost.
On: The product always reprints jammed pages.
Additional memory is allocated to store the last few pages printed. This might cause overall performance to suffer.
The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available.
This is the default setting.
This option allows you list the jobs either alphabetically or chronologically.
184 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-39 General Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level
Quick Copy Job
Held Timeout
Quick Copy Job
Storage Limit
Third level Fourth level Values
Off*
1 Hour
4 Hours
1 Day
1 Week
1-100
Default = 32
Enable Retrieve from USB
Hold Off Print
Job
Restore Factory
Settings
Default Folder
Name
Enabled
Disabled*
Enabled
Disabled*
Cancel
Reset
Description
Sets a maximum storage-time limit for stored Quick Copy and Proof and Hold jobs. If a stored job is not printed during this period, it is deleted.
Configure global settings for jobs that are stored in the product memory.
The Quick Copy
Job Storage Limit
feature specifies the number of Quick
Copy and Proof and
Hold jobs that can be stored on the product. The maximum allowed value is 100.
Type the name for the stored jobs folder that is accessible to all users.
Enables the product to open a file from a
USB device.
Use this setting to prevent network print jobs from starting within a specified period after a job is completed.
Use this setting to restore all product settings to their factory defaults.
General Print Settings menu
To display: At the product control panel, open the Administration menu, and then open the
General Print Settings menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 185
Table 2-40 General Print Settings menu
First level Second level
Manual Feed
Values
Enabled
Disabled*
Courier Font
Wide A4
Print PS Errors
Print PDF Errors
Personality
PCL
186
Form Length
Chapter 2 Solve problems
Regular*
Dark
Enabled
Disabled*
Enabled
Disabled*
Enabled
Disabled*
Auto*
PCL
POSTSCRIPT
Range: 5 – 128
Default = 60
Description
Use to enable or disable the manual-feed feature, which allows the user to feed paper into the product by hand. When this feature is enabled, the user can select manual feed from the control panel as the paper source for a job. If a tray is not specified as part of a job, manual feed is selected.
Select which version of the
Courier font you want to use. The factory default setting is
Regular, which uses an average stroke width. The Dark setting can be used if a heavier
Courier font is needed.
Changes the printable area of
A4-size paper. If you enable this option, eighty 10-pitch characters can be printed on a single line of A4 paper.
Use this feature to select whether a PostScript (PS) error page is printed when the product encounters a PS error.
Selects whether a PDF error page is printed when the product encounters a PDF error.
Configures the default print language or personality for the product. Normally you should not change the product language. If you change the setting to a specific product language, the product does not automatically switch from one language to another unless specific software commands are sent to it.
Controls the PCL print-command options. PCL is a set of productcommands that Hewlett-
Packard developed to provide access to productfeatures.
Use the Form Length feature to select the user-soft default vertical form length.
ENWW
Table 2-40 General Print Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level
Orientation
Font Source
Font Number
Font Pitch
Font Point Size
Symbol Set
Values
Portrait*
Landscape
Internal*
Range: 0 – 110
Default = 0
Range: 0.44 – 99.99
Default = 10
Range: 4.00 – 999.75
Default = 12.00
Select from a list of symbol sets.
Description
Select the orientation that is most often used for copy or scan originals. Select the Portrait option if the short edge is at the top or select the Landscape option if the long edge is at the top.
Selects the font source for the user-soft default font. The list of available options varies depending on the installed product options.
Specifies the font number for the user-soft default font using the source that is specified in the
Font Source menu. The product assigns a number to each font and lists it on the PCL font list.
The font number displays in the
Font # column of the printout.
If the Font Source option and the Font Number setting indicate a contour font, then use this feature to select a default pitch (for a fixed-spaced font).
If the Font Source option and the Font Number setting indicate a contour font, then use this feature to select a default point size (for a proportionalspaced font).
Select any one of several available symbol sets from the control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font. The factory default value for this option is
PC-8. Either PC-8 or PC-850 are recommended for line-draw characters.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 187
Table 2-40 General Print Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Values
Append CR to LF
No*
Yes
Suppress Blank Pages
No*
Yes
Media Source Mapping
Standard*
Classic
Description
Configure whether a carriage return (CR) is appended to each line feed (LF) encountered in backwards-compatible PCL jobs
(pure text, no job control). Select
Yes to append the carriage return. The default setting is No.
Some environments, such as
UNIX, indicate a new line by using only the line-feed control code. This option allows the user to append the required carriage return to each line feed.
This option is for users who are generating their own PCL, which could include extra form feeds that would cause blank pages to be printed. When the Yes option is selected, form feeds are ignored if the page is blank.
Use to select and maintain input trays by number when you are not using the product driver, or when the software program has no option for tray selection. The following options are available:
Standard: Tray numbering is based on newer HP LaserJet models.
Classic: Tray numbering is based on HP LaserJet 4 and older models.
Default Print Options menu
To display: At the product control panel, open the Administration menu, and then open the
Default Print Options menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-41 Default Print Options menu
First level Second level
Number of Copies
Values Description
Default = 1 for a copy job. This default applies when the Copy function or the Quick Copy function is initiated from the product Home screen.
188 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-41 Default Print Options menu (continued)
First level Second level
Default Paper Size
Default Custom Paper Size inches mm
Sides
2-Sided Format
Edge-to-Edge
Values
Select from a list of sizes that the product supports.
X Dimension
Y Dimension
1-sided*
2-sided
Book-style*
Flip-style
Normal (recommended)*
Edge-to-Edge output
Description
Configures the default paper size used for print jobs.
Configures the default paper size that is used when the user selects
Custom as the paper size for a print job.
X dimension range: 3-8.5 in
X dimension default = 8.5 in
Y dimension range: 5-14 in
Y dimension default = 14 in
Use to indicate whether the original document is printed on one or both sides, and whether the copies should be printed on one or both sides. For example, select the 1-sided original, 2-
sided output option when the original is printed on one side, but you want to make two-sided copies.
Select the Orientation setting to specify portrait or landscape orientation and to select the way the second sides are printed.
Configures the default style for 2sided print jobs. If the Book-
style option is selected, the back side of the page is printed the right way up. This option is for print jobs that are bound along the left edge. If the Flip-
style option is selected, the back side of the page is printed upside-down. This option is for print jobs that are bound along the top edge.
Use to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges of copies when the original document is printed close to the edges.
Display Settings menu
To display: At the product control panel, open the Administration menu, and then open the
Display Settings menu.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 189
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-42 Display Settings menu
First level Values
Display Brightness
Language
Range: -10 to 10
The default value is 0.
Select from a list of languages that the product supports.
Show IP Address
Inactivity Timeout
Display*
Hide
Range: 10 – 300 seconds
Default = 60 seconds
Description
Use to specify the intensity of the LCD control panel display.
Use to select a different language for control-panel messages and specify the default keyboard layout. When you select a new language, the keyboard layout automatically changes to match the factory default for the selected language.
Use this menu item to display or hide the IP address on the Home screen.
Clearable Warnings
Continuable Events
On
Job*
Auto-continue (10
seconds)*
Press OK to continue
Specifies the amount of time that elapses between any activity on the control panel and when the product resets to the default settings.
When the timeout expires, the control-panel display returns to the
Home menu, and any user signed in to the product is signed out.
Use this feature to set the period that a clearable warning displays on the control panel. If the On setting is selected, clearable warnings appear until the Clearable Warnings button is pressed.
If theJob setting is selected, clearable warnings stay on the display during the job that generated the warning and disappear from the display when the next job starts.
Use this option to configure the product behavior when the product encounters certain errors. If the Auto-continue (10 seconds) option is selected, the job will continue after 10 seconds. If thePress
OK to continue option is selected, the job will stop and require the user to press theOK button before continuing.
190 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Manage Supplies menu
To display: At the product control panel, open the Administration menu, and then open the
Manage Supplies menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-43 Manage Supplies menu
First level
Print Supplies
Status
Supply Settings
Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
the status page.
Black Cartridge Low Threshold
Settings
Very Low
Settings
1-100%
Default = 10%
Stop
Prompt to
continue*
Set the estimated percentage at which the product notifies you when the toner cartridge is very low.
Specifies how the product notifies you when the toner cartridge is very low.
Continue
Stop: The product stops until you replace the toner cartridge.
Maintenance Kit Low Threshold
Settings
Very Low
Settings
Range of 1% to
100%.
The default value is
10%.
Stop
Prompt to
continue*
Continue
Prompt to
continue: The product stops and prompts you to replace the toner cartridge. You can acknowledge the prompt and continue printing.
Continue: The product alerts you that a toner cartridge is very low, but it continues printing.
Set the estimated percentage at which the product notifies you when the toner cartridge is very low.
Specifies how the product notifies you when the fuser is very low.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 191
Table 2-43 Manage Supplies menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
Store Usage Data
Fourth level
Supply Messages Low Message
Level Gauge
Reset Supplies New
Maintenance Kit
Values
On supplies
Not on supplies
On*
Off
On*
Off
Reset
Cancel
Description
The Store Usage
Data menu provides a way to suppress the toner cartridges from storing most of the information gathered exclusively for the purpose of understanding the usage of the product.
Select the On
supplies setting to store the data on the toner cartridge memory chip. Select the Not on
supplies setting to suppress the information from being stored on the memory chip.
Use to configure whether a message displays on the control panel when supplies are getting low, but have not yet reached the low threshold.
Use this setting to show or hide a supplies level gauge on the product control panel.
Select this option if you have installed a new maintenance kit.
Manage Trays menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the
Manage Trays menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
192 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-44 Manage Trays menu
First level
Use Requested Tray
Values
Exclusively*
First
Manually Feed Prompt
Always*
Unless loaded
Size/Type Prompt
Display*
Do not display
Use Another Tray
Enabled*
Disabled
ENWW
Description
Controls how the product handles jobs that have specified a specific input tray. Two options are available:
Exclusively: The product never selects a different tray when the user has indicated that a specific tray should be used, even if that tray is empty.
First: The product pulls from another tray if the specified tray is empty, even though the user specifically indicated a tray for the job.
Indicate whether a prompt should appear when the type or size for a job does not match the specified tray and the product pulls from the multipurpose tray instead. Two options are available:
Always: A prompt always displays before using the multipurpose tray.
Unless loaded: A message displays only if the multipurpose tray is empty.
Controls whether the tray configuration message displays whenever a tray is closed.
Two options are available:
Display: This option shows the tray configuration message when a tray is closed.
The user is able to configure the tray settings directly from this message.
Do not display: This option prevents the tray configuration message from automatically appearing.
Use to turn on or off the control-panel prompt to select another tray when the specified tray is empty. Two options are available:
Enabled: When this option is selected, the user is prompted either to add paper to the selected tray or to choose a different tray.
Disabled: When this option is selected, the user is not given the option of selecting a different tray. The product prompts the user to add paper to the tray that was initially selected.
Tools for troubleshooting 193
Table 2-44 Manage Trays menu (continued)
First level Values
Alternative Letterhead Mode
Disabled*
Enabled
Duplex Blank Pages
Override A4/Letter
Auto*
Yes
Yes*
No
Description
Use to load letterhead or preprinted paper into the tray the same way for all print jobs, whether you are printing to one side of the sheet or to both sides of the sheet. When this option is selected, load the paper as you would for printing on both sides. See the user documentation that came with the product for instructions about loading letterhead for printing on both sides. When this option is selected, the product speed slows to the speed required for printing on both sides.
Control how the product handles two-sided jobs (duplexing). Two options are available:
Auto: This option enables Smart Duplexing, which instructs the product not to process blank pages.
Yes: This option disables Smart Duplexing and forces the duplexer to flip the sheet of paper even if it is printed on only one side.
This might be preferable for certain jobs that use paper types such as letterhead or prepunched paper.
Prints on letter-size paper when an A4 job is sent but no A4-size paper is loaded in the product (or to print on A4 paper when a letter-size job is sent but no letter-size paper is loaded). This option will also override A3 with ledger-size paper and ledger with A3size paper.
Network Settings menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the
Network Settings menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
194 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-45 Network Settings menu
First level
I/O Timeout
Jetdirect Menu
Values
Range: 5 – 300 sec
Default = 15
See the table that follows for details. These menus have the same structure. If an additional HP Jetdirect network card is installed in the EIO slot, then both menus are available.
Description
Use to set the I/O timeout period in seconds.
I/O timeout refers to the elapsed time before a print job fails. If the stream of data that the product receives for a print job gets interrupted, this setting indicates how long the product will wait before it reports that the job has failed.
Table 2-46 Jetdirect Menu
First level Second level
Information Print Sec Report
Third level
TCP/IP Enable
Host Name
Fourth level Values Description
Yes
No*
Yes: Prints a page that contains the current security settings on the
HP Jetdirect print server.
On*
Off
No: A security settings page is not printed.
On: Enable the TCP/
IP protocol.
Off: Disable the
TCP/IP protocol.
the buttons to edit the
An alphanumeric string, up to 32 host name.
NPIXXXXXX* characters, used to identify the product.
This name is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page.
The default host name is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the
LAN hardware
(MAC) address.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 195
Table 2-46 Jetdirect Menu (continued)
First level Second level
IPV4 Settings
Third level
Config Method
Fourth level Values
Bootp
DHCP*
Auto IP
Manual
Manual Settings
NOTE:
This menu is available only if you select the
Manual option under the Config
Method menu.
IP Address
Enter the address.
Subnet Mask
Enter the address.
Default Gateway
Enter the address.
Description
Auto IP: Use for automatic link-local
IPv4 addressing. An address in the form
169.254.x.x is assigned automatically.
If you set this option to the Manual setting, use the
Manual Settings
menu to configure
TCP/IPv4 parameters.
(Available only if the
Config Method
option is set to the
Manual option.)
Configure parameters directly from the product control panel:
Specifies the method that TCP/IPv4 parameters will be configured on the
HP Jetdirect print server.
Bootp (Bootstrap
Protocol): Use for automatic configuration from a
BootP server.
DHCP (Dynamic
Host Configuration
Protocol): Use for automatic configuration from a
DHCPv4 server. If selected and a DHCP lease exists, the
DHCP Release
menu and the DHCP
Renew menu are available to set
DHCP lease options.
196 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-46 Jetdirect Menu (continued)
First level Second level
IPV6 Settings
Third level
Default IP
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Enable
Address
Fourth level
Manual Settings
Values
Auto IP*
Legacy
Range: 0 – 255
Default =
xxx.xxx.xx.xx
Range: 0 – 255
Default = 0.0.0.0
Off
On*
Enable
Address
Description
Specify the IP address to default to when the print server is unable to obtain an IP address from the network during a forced TCP/IP reconfiguration (for example, when manually configured to use BootP or
DHCP).
NOTE:
This feature assigns a static IP address that might interfere with a managed network.
Auto IP: A link-local
IP address
169.254.x.x is set.
Legacy: The address
192.0.0.192 is set, consistent with older
HP Jetdirect products.
Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary Domain
Name System (DNS)
Server.
Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Secondary DNS
Server.
Use this item to enable or disable
IPv6 operation on the print server.
Off: IPv6 is disabled.
On: IPv6 is enabled.
Use this item to enable and manually configure a TCP/
IPv6 address.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 197
Table 2-46 Jetdirect Menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
DHCPV6 Policy
Fourth level
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Values
Router Specified
Router
Unavailable*
Always
Description
Router Specified:
The stateful autoconfiguration method to be used by the print server is determined by a router. The router specifies whether the print server obtains its address, its configuration information, or both from a DHCPv6 server.
Router
Unavailable: If a router is not available, the print server should attempt to obtain its stateful configuration from a
DHCPv6 server.
Always: Whether a router is available, the print server always attempts to obtain its stateful configuration from a
DHCPv6 server.
198 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-46 Jetdirect Menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
Proxy Server
Proxy Port
Idle Timeout
Fourth level Values
Select from a provided list.
Description
Specifies the proxy server to be used by embedded applications in the product. A proxy server is typically used by network clients for Internet access. It caches
Web pages, and provides a degree of
Internet security, for those clients.
To specify a proxy server, enter its IPv4 address or fullyqualified domain name. The name can be up to 255 octets.
For some networks, you might need to contact your Internet
Service Provider (ISP) for the proxy server address.
number used by the proxy server for client support. The port number identifies the port reserved for proxy activity on your network, and can be a value from 0 to
65535.
seconds, after which an idle TCP print data connection is closed (default is
270 seconds, 0 disables the timeout).
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 199
Table 2-46 Jetdirect Menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
Security Secure Web
IPSEC
802.1X
Fourth level Values
HTTPS Required*
HTTPS Optional
Keep
Disable*
Reset
Keep*
Description
For configuration management, specify whether the HP
Embedded Web
Server will accept communications using HTTPS (Secure
HTTP) only, or both
HTTP and HTTPS.
HTTPS Required:
For secure, encrypted communications, only HTTPS access is accepted. The print server will appear as a secure site.
Specify the IPSec status on the print server.
Keep: IPSec status remains the same as currently configured.
Disable: IPSec operation on the print server is disabled.
Specify whether the
802.1X settings on the print server are reset to the factory defaults.
Reset: The 802.1X
settings are reset to the factory defaults.
Keep: The current
802.1X settings are maintained.
200 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-46 Jetdirect Menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
Reset Security
Fourth level Values
Yes
No*
Description
Specify whether the current security settings on the print server will be saved or reset to factory defaults.
Yes: Security settings are reset to factory defaults.
No: The current security settings are maintained.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 201
Table 2-46 Jetdirect Menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
Diagnostics Embedded Tests LAN HW Test
Fourth level Values
Yes
No*
Description
Provides tests to help diagnose network hardware or TCP/IP network connection problems.
Embedded tests help to identify whether a network fault is internal or external to the product. Use an embedded test to check hardware and communication paths on the print server.
After you select and enable a test and set the execution time, you must select the
Execute option to initiate the test.
Depending on the execution time, a selected test runs continuously until either the product is turned off, or an error occurs and a diagnostic page is printed.
CAUTION:
Running this embedded test will erase your TCP/IP configuration.
This test performs an internal loopback test. An internal loopback test will send and receive packets only on the internal network hardware. There are no external transmissions on your network.
202 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-46 Jetdirect Menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
HTTP Test
Fourth level Values
Yes
No*
SNMP Test
Data Path Test
Select All Tests
Yes
No*
Yes
No*
Yes
No*
Description
This test checks operation of HTTP by retrieving predefined pages from the product, and tests the
HP Embedded Web
Server.
Select the Yes option to choose this test, or the No option to not choose it.
This test checks operation of SNMP communications by accessing predefined
SNMP objects on the product.
Select the Yes option to choose this test, or the No option to not choose it.
This test helps to identify data path and corruption problems on an HP postscript level 3 emulation product. It sends a predefined
PS file to the product,
However, the test is paperless; the file will not print.
Select the Yes option to choose this test, or the No option to not choose it.
Use this item to select all available embedded tests.
Select the Yes option to choose all tests. Select the No option to select individual tests.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 203
Table 2-46 Jetdirect Menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
Execution Time
[H]
Fourth level
Ping Test
Execute
Dest Type
Dest IPv4
Dest IPv6
Packet Size
Values
Range: 1 – 24 hours
Default = 1 hour
No*
Yes
IPv4
IPv6
Description
Specify the length of time (in hours) that an embedded test will be run. If you select zero (0), the test runs indefinitely until an error occurs or the product is turned off.
Data gathered from the HTTP, SNMP, and Data Path tests is printed after the tests have completed.
No: Do not initiate the selected tests.
Yes: Initiate the selected tests.
This test is used to check network communications. This test sends link-level packets to a remote network host, then waits for an appropriate response. To run a ping test, set the following items:
Dest Type
Specify whether the target product is an
IPv4 or IPv6 node.
Enter the IPv4 address.
Range: 0 – 255
Default =
127.0.0.1
Select from a provided list.
Default = : : 1
Enter the IPv6 address.
each packet, in bytes, to be sent to the remote host. The minimum is 64
(default) and the maximum is 2048.
204 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-46 Jetdirect Menu (continued)
First level Second level
Ping Results
Third level Fourth level Values Description
Timeout
= time, in seconds, to wait for a response from the remote host.
The maximum is
100.
Count
Print Results
= of ping test packets to send for this test.
Select a value from 0 to 100. To configure the test to run continuously, select
0.
Yes
No*
Execute Yes
No*
No: Do not initiate the selected tests.
Packets Sent
= packets (0 - 65535) sent to the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed..
Packets Received 00000
Yes: Initiate the selected tests.
Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) received from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed. The default is 0.
Percent Lost
= to 100) of ping test packets that were sent with no response from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 205
Table 2-46 Jetdirect Menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
RTT Min
RTT Max
RTT Average
Ping In Progress
Refresh
Fourth level Values Description
= detected roundtriptime (RTT), from 0 to
4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response.
Yes
No*
Yes
No* detected roundtriptime (RTT), from 0 to
4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response.
round-trip-time (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response.
Shows whether a ping test is in progress. Yes:
Indicates a test in progress. No:
Indicates that a test completed or was not run.
When viewing the ping test results, this item upgrades the ping test data with current results. Select the Yes option to upgrade the data, or the No option to maintain the existing data. However, a refresh automatically occurs when the menu times out or you manually return to the main menu.
206 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-46 Jetdirect Menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
Link Speed
Fourth level Values
Auto*
10T Half
10T Full
10T Auto
100TX Half
Description
The link speed and communication mode of the print server must match the network. The available settings depend on the product and installed print server. Select one of the following link configuration settings:
CAUTION:
If you change the link setting, network communications with the print server and network product might be lost.
The print server uses auto-negotiation to configure itself with the highest link speed and communication mode allowed. If autonegotiation fails, either the 100TX
Half feature or the
10T Half feature is set depending on the detected link speed of the hub/switch port. (A 1000T halfduplex selection is not supported.)
10 Mbps, halfduplex operation.
10 Mbps, full-duplex operation.
100 Mbps, halfduplex operation.
100 Mbps, fullduplex operation.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 207
Table 2-46 Jetdirect Menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values
100TX Full
100TX Auto
Description
Limits autonegotiation to a maximum link speed of 100 Mbps.
1000 Mbps, fullduplex operation.
Troubleshooting menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the
Troubleshooting menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-47 Troubleshooting menu
First level
Print Event Log
View Event Log
Print Paper Path
Page
Print Quality
Pages
Diagnostic Tests
Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
how pages were printed from each tray.
Print Fuser Test
Page
to that help you resolve problems with print quality.
Print or view a list of the 1,000 most recent events in the event log. For each event, the printed log shows the error number, page count, error code, and description or personality.
Paper Path
Sensors
Paper Path Test Print Test Page
Source Tray
Select from a list of the product sensors.
Select from a list of the available trays.
Initiates a test of the paper path sensors.
Generates a test page for testing paper handling features. You can define the path that is used for the test in order to test specific paper paths.
208 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-47 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
Test Duplex Path
Fourth level
Number of
Copies
Manual Sensor
Test
Tray/Bin Manual
Sensor Test
Values
Off*
On
Description
Default = 1
Select from a list of available components.
Reset Sensors
Select from a list of available components.
Reset Sensors
number of copies for a copy job. This default applies when the Copy or Quick
Copy function is initiated from the product Home screen. The factory default setting is 1.
Test the product sensors and switches for correct operation.
Each sensor is displayed on the control-panel screen, along with its status.
Manually trip each sensor and watch for it to change on the screen. Press the
Stop button to abort the test.
Test the sensors in the trays and bins for correct operation.
Each sensor is displayed on the control-panel screen, along with its status.
Manually trip each sensor and watch for it to change on the screen. Press the
Stop button to abort the test.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 209
Table 2-47 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
Component Test
Retrieve
Diagnostic Data
Print/Stop Test
Fourth level Values
Select from a list of available components.
Export to USB
Diagnostic Files
Include crash dump files
Clean up debug info
Start
Description
Use to exercise individual parts independently to isolate noise, leaking, or other issues. To start the test, select one of the components. The test will run the number of times specified by the Repeat option.
You might be prompted to remove parts from the product during the test. Press the Stop button to abort the test.
Specify the length of time in milliseconds
(0-60,000).
Create files that contain information about the product that can help identify the cause of problems.
Generate Debug
Data
Device Maintenance menu
Backup/Restore menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the
Backup/Restore menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
210 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-48 Backup/Restore menu
First level Second level
Backup Data Backup Now
Restore Data
Third level Values Description
Insert a USB drive to which the product will save a backup file.
Insert a USB drive that contains the backup file.
Calibration/Cleaning menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the
Calibration/Cleaning menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-49 Calibration/Cleaning menu
First level Second level
Auto Cleaning
Cleaning Interval
Auto Cleaning Size
Print Cleaning Page
Values
Off*
Description
Use to set an automatic cleaning period for the product.
On
Select from a list of cleaning intervals.
Use to set the interval when the automatic cleaning page should be printed. The interval is measured by the number of pages printed.
Select from a list of support sizes. Select the paper size to use for the automatic cleaning page.
Prints a page to clean the paper path. The process takes up to
1.5 minutes.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 211
USB Firmware Upgrade menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the
USB Firmware Upgrade menu.
Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the onscreen instructions.
Service menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the
Service menu.
The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access. This menu is intended for use by authorized service personnel.
212 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Interpret control-panel messages
Control-panel message types
The control-panel messages and event code errors indicate the current product status or situations that might require action.
NOTE:
Event log errors may or may not appear on the control-panel display. Access the event log to view or print the event log errors.
Control-panel messages appear temporarily and might require that you acknowledge the message by pressing the OK button to resume printing or by pressing the Stop button to cancel the job. With certain messages, the job might not finish printing or the print quality might be affected. If the message is related to printing and the auto-continue feature is on, the product will attempt to resume printing after the message has appeared for 10 seconds without acknowledgement.
For some messages, restarting the product might fix the problem. If a critical error persists, the product might require service.
Control-panel messages
11.00.YY Internal clock error To continue, touch “OK”
Description
The product real-time clock has experienced an error.
◦
XX = 01: Clock battery failed
◦
XX = 02: Real-time clock failed
Recommended action
Whenever the product is turned off and then turned on again, set the time and date at the control panel.
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
20.00.00 Insufficient memory: <Device> To continue, touch “OK”
Description
The product has experienced a memory error. You might have tried to transfer too many fonts or macros.
Recommended action
Press the OK button to print the transferred data. Some data might be lost. Reduce the page complexity or add product memory.
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
213
21.00.00 Page too complex To continue, touch “OK”
Description
The page decompression process was too slow for the product.
Recommended action
Press the OK button to continue. There may be some data loss.
33.WX.YZ Used board/disk installed
Description
An encrypted board or disk with existing data previously locked to a different product has replaced the original. If you continue, data is permanently lost.
Recommended action
◦
To save the data on the board or disk, turn the product off. Replace the board or disk with another board or disk.
◦
To delete the data on the board or disk and continue, press the OK button.
40.00.01 USB I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK”
Description
The USB buffer overflowed during a busy state.
Recommended action
1. Press the OK button to print the transferred data. Some data might be lost.
2. Check the host configuration.
40.00.02 Embedded I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK”
Description
Too much data was sent to the embedded HP Jetdirect print server. An incorrect communications protocol might be in use.
Recommended action
1. Press the OK button to print the transferred data. Some data might be lost.
2. Check the host configuration.
40.00.03 EIO <X> buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK”
Description
The product displays this message when the EIO card in the indicated slot has overflowed its I/O buffer during a busy state.
214 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Recommended action
Press the OK button to continue.
40.00.04 EIO <X> bad transmission To continue, touch “OK”
Description
The product displays this message when a connection with the card in the indicated slot has been abnormally broken.
Recommended action
Press the OK button to continue.
40.00.05 Embedded I/O bad transmission To continue, touch “OK”
Description
The product experienced a temporary printing error. The connection between the product and the EIO card in the specified slot has been broken.
Recommended action
Press the OK button to clear the error message and continue printing.
41.03.YZ Unexpected size in Tray <X>
Description
The product detected a different paper size than expected.
Y = Size mismatch, Z = Source
◦
Y = 0: Detected paper is longer or shorter than expected
◦
Y = A: Detected paper too long
◦
Y = B: Detected paper too short
◦
Z = 1: Tray 1
◦
Z = 2: Tray 2
◦
Z = 3: Tray 3
Recommended action
1. Make sure that the tray is loaded with the correct paper size and that the sliding paper guides are correctly adjusted.
2. Use the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to verify that the tray paper switch is correctly functioning.
3. If the error persists, replace the lifter assembly.
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
215
41.03.YZ Unexpected size in Tray <X> To use another tray, touch "Options"
Description
The product detected a different paper size than expected.
Y = Size mismatch, Z = Source
◦
Y = 0: Detected paper is longer or shorter than expected
◦
Y = A: Detected paper too long
◦
Y = B: Detected paper too short
◦
Z = 1: Tray 1
◦
Z = 2: Tray 2
◦
Z = 3: Tray 3
Recommended action
1. Make sure that the tray is loaded with the correct paper size and that the sliding paper guides are correctly adjusted.
2. Use the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to verify that the tray paper switch is correctly functioning.
3. If the error persists, replace the lifter assembly.
41.05.YZ Unexpected type in Tray <X>
Description
The product detected a different paper type than expected.
Y = Expected type, Z = Detected type
◦
Y = 0: Unknown
◦
Y = 1: Normal paper
◦
Y = 3: LBP transparency
◦
Y = 4 Glossy paper
◦
Y = 5: Gloss film
◦
Y = 6: Non-assured transparency
◦
Y = 7: Heavy paper
◦
Y = 8: Light paper
◦
Y = 9: Rough paper
◦
Y = A: Extra heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 3)
◦
Y = B: Heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 2)
216 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
◦
Y = C: Heavy paper 3
◦
Y = D: Heavy paper 2
◦
Z = 1: Normal paper
◦
Z = 3: LBP transparency
◦
Z = 4: Glossy paper
◦
Z = 5: Gloss film
◦
Z = 6: Non-assured transparency
◦
Z = 7: Heavy paper
◦
Z = 8: Light paper
◦
Z = 9: Rough paper
◦
Z = A: Extra heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 3)
◦
Z = B: Heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 2)
◦
Z = C: Heavy paper 3
◦
Z = D: Heavy paper 2
Recommended action
1. Load the tray with the size and type of paper indicated, or use another tray if available.
2. If this message appears and the tray is loaded with the correct paper type, check the print driver settings to make sure that they match the tray type settings.
3. Clean the paper sensor.
4. If the error persists, replace the paper pickup assembly.
41.05.YZ Unexpected type in Tray <X> To use another tray, touch "Options"
Description
The product detected a different paper type than expected and another tray is available for use.
Y = Expected type, Z = Detected type
◦
Y = 0: Unknown
◦
Y = 1: Normal paper
◦
Y = 3: LBP transparency
◦
Y = 4 Glossy paper
◦
Y = 5: Gloss film
◦
Y = 6: Non-assured transparency
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
217
◦
Y = 7: Heavy paper
◦
Y = 8: Light paper
◦
Y = 9: Rough paper
◦
Y = A: Extra heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 3)
◦
Y = B: Heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 2)
◦
Y = C: Heavy paper 3
◦
Y = D: Heavy paper 2
◦
Z = 1: Normal paper
◦
Z = 3: LBP transparency
◦
Z = 4: Glossy paper
◦
Z = 5: Gloss film
◦
Z = 6: Non-assured transparency
◦
Z = 7: Heavy paper
◦
Z = 8: Light paper
◦
Z = 9: Rough paper
◦
Z = A: Extra heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 3)
◦
Z = B: Heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 2)
◦
Z = C: Heavy paper 3
◦
Z = D: Heavy paper 2
Recommended action
1. Load the tray with the size and type of paper indicated, or use another tray if available.
2. If this message appears and the tray is loaded with the correct paper type, check the print driver settings to make sure that they match the tray type settings.
3. Clean the paper sensor.
4. If the error persists, replace the paper pickup assembly.
41.WX.YZ Error To use another tray, touch "Options"
Description
A printer error has occurred.
218 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
ENWW
WX =
◦
02: Beam detected misprint error
◦
06: ITB top detection error
◦
07: Paper transportation error
◦
08: Optional input source delay
◦
09: Sub-thermistor abnormally high temperature
◦
18: Scan line inclination adjustment request
◦
19: T2 roller HV
◦
20: Image drum HV
Y = fuser mode
◦
0: Photo paper 1, Photo paper 2, Photo paper 3, Designated paper 2, Designated paper 3, or
NA, typed or Autosense
◦
1: Autosense (normal): special case distinguished from typed Normal
◦
2: Normal, typed (not Autosense)
◦
3: Light paper 1, 2, or 3, typed or Autosense
◦
4: Heavy paper 1, typed or Autosense
◦
5: Heavy paper 2, typed or Autosense
◦
6: Heavy paper 3, typed or Autosense
◦
7: Glossy paper 1, typed or Autosense
◦
8: Glossy paper 2, typed or Autosense
◦
9: Glossy paper 3, typed or Autosense
◦
A: Glossy film, typed or Autosense
◦
B: Transparency, typed or Autosense
◦
C: Label
◦
D: Envelope 1, Envelope 2, Envelope 3
◦
E: Rough (designated paper 1), typed or Autosense
◦
F: reserved for future fuser mode
Z = source tray
◦
1: Tray 1
◦
2: Tray 2
Tools for troubleshooting
219
◦
3: Tray 3
◦
D: Duplexer
Recommended action
1. To clear message, press the OK button.
2. If the message reappears, turn the product off and then on.
3. If the error persists, replace the DC controller PCA.
47.FC.YZ Printer calibration failed To continue, touch “OK”
Description
The product is unable to access or implement one of the image pattern files.
Y = calibration type, Z = event
◦
47.FC.00 (event code): Color plane registration (CPR) image not found at system initialization
◦
47.FC.01 (event code): CPR store image failure
◦
47.FC.02 (event code): CPR image not found
◦
47.FC.03 (event code): CPR print engine execution failure
◦
47.FC.10 (event code): Consecutive Dmax Dhalf image not found at system initialization
◦
47.FC.11 (event code): Consecutive Dmax Dhalf store image failure
◦
47.FC.12 (event code): Consecutive Dmax Dhalf image not found
◦
47.FC.13 (event code): Consecutive Dmax Dhalf print engine execution failure
◦
47.FC.20 (event code): Error diffusion image not found at system initialization
◦
47.FC.21 (event code): Error diffusion store image failure
◦
47.FC.22 (event code): Error diffusion image not found
◦
47.FC.23 (event code): Error diffusion print engine execution failure
◦
47.FC.30 (event code): Drum speed adjustment Image not found at system initialization
◦
47.FC.31 (event code): Drum speed adjustment store image failure
◦
47.FC.32 (event code): Drum speed adjustment image not found
◦
47.FC.33 (event code): Drum speed adjustment print engine execution failure
◦
47.FC.40 (event code): Pulse width modulation image not found at system initialization
◦
47.FC.41 (event code): Pulse width modulation store image failure
220 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
◦
47.FC.42 (event code): Pulse width modulation image not found
◦
47.FC.43 (event code): Pulse width modulation print engine execution failure
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. If the error persists, reload the firmware.
47.WX.YZ Printer calibration failed
Description
The print quality calibration failed. This message is for development and will not be seen by customers.
Recommended action
Turn the product off and then on.
49.XX.YY Error To continue turn off then on
Description
A firmware error has occurred. This error can be caused by corrupted print jobs, software applications issues, non-product specific print drivers, poor-quality USB or network cables, bad network connections or incorrect configurations, invalid firmware operations, or unsupported accessories.
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. If the error persists, check the following:
●
The error might be caused by a network connectivity problem, such as a bad interface cable, a bad USB port, or an invalid network configuration setting.
●
The error might be caused by the print job, such as an invalid print driver, a problem with the software application, or a problem with the file you are printing.
●
Upgrading the product firmware might help resolve the error. See the product user guide for more information.
50.WX.YZ Fuser error To continue turn off then on
Description
The product experienced a fuser error.
◦
W = fuser error code
◦
X = fuser mode
●
0: Photo paper 1, 2, 3, Designated paper 2, 3, or NA, typed or AutoSense
●
1: AutoSense (Normal special case distinguished from typed Normal)
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
221
●
2: Normal, typed (not AutoSense)
●
3: Light paper 1, 2, or 3, typed or AutoSense
●
4: Heavy paper 1, typed or AutoSense
●
5: Heavy paper 2, typed or AutoSense
●
6: Heavy paper 3, typed or AutoSense
●
7: Glossy paper 1, typed or AutoSense
●
8: Glossy paper 2, typed or AutoSense
●
9: Glossy paper 3, typed or AutoSense
●
A: Glossy film, typed or AutoSense
●
B: Transparency, typed or AutoSense
●
C: Label
●
D: Envelope1, Envelope2, or Envelope3
●
E: Rough (designated paper 1), typed or AutoSense
●
F: Reserved for future fuser mode
◦
Y = previous product sleep state
◦
Z = next product sleep state
●
0: Printing
●
1: Standby level 1 (no temperature control)
●
2: Standby level 2 (high temperature control)
●
3: Standby level 3 (middle temperature control)
●
4: Standby level 4 (low temperature control)
●
5: Middle sleep
●
6: Deep sleep
●
F: Off
Recommended action
W = A: High fuser temperature 2
1. Remove and then reseat the fuser. Make sure there is no residual paper in the fuser. Make sure the product is not located in front of a vent or window where cool air may interfere with the ability of the fuser to heat up.
2. Check the product power source. Make sure the power source meets product requirements. Make sure this is the only device using the circuit.
222 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
ENWW
3. Check the connector (J1) between the fuser and the product. If it is damaged, replace the fuser.
4. If this product was previously serviced, check the connector (J61) on the DC controller PCA.
5. If the error persists, replace the fuser.
W = B: High fuser temperature 3
1. Remove and then reseat the fuser. Remove any residual paper in the product.
2. Check the paper type setting using the product menus and in the print driver. Making sure that they match and are correct for the type of paper being used.
3. If this product was previously serviced, check the connector (J61) on the DC controller PCA.
4. If the error persists, replace the fuser.
W = 1, Low fuser error temperature error
1. Remove and then reseat the fuser.
2. Check the paper type setting using the product menus and in the product driver. Make sure that they match and are correct for the type of paper being used.
3. If this product was previously serviced, check the connector (J61) on the DC controller PCA.
4. If the error persists, replace the fuser.
W = 2, Fuser warm-up failure
1. Reconnect the connector (J61) between the fuser and the DC controller PCA.
2. Turn the product off. Remove the fuser, and then reinstall it.
3. Replace the fuser wire harness.
4. If the error persists, replace the fuser.
W = 3, High fuser temperature 1
1. Remove and then reseat the fuser.
2. Check the paper type setting using the product menus and in the product driver. Make sure that they match and are correct for the type of paper being used.
3. If this product was previously serviced, check the connector (J61) on the DC controller PCA.
4. If the error persists, replace the fuser.
W = 4, Fuser power supply driving circuit error
1. Remove and then reseat the fuser.
2. If this product was previously serviced, check the connector (J61) on the DC controller PCA.
3. If the error persists, replace the fuser.
Tools for troubleshooting
223
W = 6, Open fuser, breaking of a heater wire
1. Check the power source. Make sure the power source meets product requirements.
NOTE:
If the power source does not meet the power frequency requirement of 43 to 67Hz, the fuser temperature control does not work properly and causes this error.
2. If this product was previously serviced, check the connector (J61) on the DC controller PCA.
3. If the error persists, replace the low-voltage power supply.
W = 7, Fuser pressure-release mechanism failure
1. Remove and then reseat the fuser. Make sure there is no residual paper in the fuser.
2. Check the fuser pressure-release sensor flag. If it is damaged, replace the fuser.
3. Use the fuser pressure-release drive test in the component test to verify that the fuser motor (M3) is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the fuser motor (M3).
4. If this product was previously serviced, check the connector (J61) on the DC controller PCA.
5. If the error persists, replace the fuser.
W = 8, Low fuser temperature 2
1. Remove and then reseat the fuser. Make sure there is no residual paper in the fuser. Make sure the product is not located in front of a vent or window where cool air may interfere with the ability of the fuser to heat up.
2. Check the product power source. Make sure the power source meets product requirements. Make sure this is the only device using the circuit.
3. Check the connector (J1) between the fuser and the product. If it is damaged, replace the fuser.
4. If this product was previously serviced, check the connector (J61) on the DC controller PCA.
5. If the error persists, replace the fuser.
W = 9, High fuser temperature 2
1. Remove and then reseat the fuser. Make sure there is no residual paper in the fuser. Make sure the product is not located in front of a vent or window where cool air may interfere with the ability of the fuser to heat up.
2. Check the product power source. Make sure the power source meets product requirements. Make sure this is the only device using the circuit.
3. Check the connector (J1) between the fuser and the product. If it is damaged, replace the fuser.
4. If this product was previously serviced, check the connector (J61) on the DC controller PCA.
5. If the error persists, replace the fuser.
224 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
51.00.YY Error To continue turn off then on
Description
An error with the laser scanner assembly has occurred in the product.
◦
YY = 10: Beam detect error
◦
YY = 19: Laser malfunction
◦
YY = 20: Black laser scanner error
Recommended action
51.00.10
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. Check the flat flexible cable (FFC) connection to the laser scanner.
3. Check connector J71 at the DC controller, and check the laser scanner connectors.
4. Replace the laser scanner.
51.00.19
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. Check the connectors on the laser scanner.
3. Replace the laser scanner.
51.00.20
1. Perform the laser scanner component tests in the Troubleshooting menu. Verify that you can hear the motor rotate.
2. If you cannot hear the motor rotate, verify that connector J71 is fully seated on the DC controller
PCA.
3. Verify that the connector on the laser scanner assembly is securely attached.
4. If the error persists, replace the laser scanner.
52.00.00 Error To continue turn off then on
Description
A scanner rotation error has occurred.
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. Perform the laser scanner component tests in the Troubleshooting menu.
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
225
3. If the component tests showed a failure, reconnect the connectors of the scanner motor (J1900 and
J801) and the DC controller PCA (J71).
4. Replace the laser-scanner assembly.
52.00.20 Error To continue turn off then on
Description
A scanner rotation error has occurred.
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. Perform the laser scanner component tests in the Troubleshooting menu.
3. If the component tests showed a startup failure, reconnect the connectors of the scanner motor
(J1900 and J801) and the DC controller PCA (J71).
4. Replace the laser-scanner assembly.
52.<XX>.00 Error To continue turn off then on
Description
The laser scanner experienced a startup error.
◦
XX = 04 or 05: Laser scanner motor startup error
◦
XX = 05: Laser scanner rotation error
Recommended action
XX = 04
1. Perform the laser scanner component tests in the Troubleshooting menu.
2. Check the connectors (J1900 and J801) on the laser scanner driver PCA and the connector (J71) on the DC controller PCA.
3. If the error persists, replace the laser scanner.
XX = 05
1. Perform the laser scanner component tests in the Troubleshooting menu.
2. Check the connectors (J1900 and J801) on the laser scanner driver PCA and the connector (J71) on the DC controller PCA.
3. If the error persists, replace the laser scanner.
54.XX.YY Error
Description
A sensor error has occurred.
226 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Recommended action
54.00.03: Environmental sensor failure
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. If the environment sensor has been removed or replaced. check the connector on the environment sensor and the connector (J63) on the DC controller PCA.
3. If the error persists, replace the environment sensor assembly.
54.00.04: Engine temperature sensor 1 abnormality warning
1. Turn the product off and then on.
55.XX.YY DC controller error To continue turn off then on
Description
The communication link between the formatter and DC controller was lost.
◦
55.00.00 (event code): Internal communication error
◦
55.00.01 (event code): DC controller memory error
◦
55.00.03 (event code): DC controller no engine response
◦
55.00.04 (event code): DC controller communications timeout
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. Perform an engine test.
3. Verify the connectors on the DC controller.
4. If the error persists, replace the DC controller.
56.00.YY Error To continue turn off then on
Description
The product experienced a communication error with the optional paper tray.
◦
56.00.01 (event code): Illegal input, selected paper input tray is unavailable
◦
56.00.02 (event code): Illegal output, selected paper output bin is unavailable
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. Reseat the optional paper tray.
3. Check the input connectors for damage. If a connector is damaged, replace the connector.
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
227
57.00.0X Error
Description
A fan error has occurred.
Recommended action
57.00.01: Fan motor 1 (rear) malfunction
1. Turn the product off and then on. Listen for fan noise at the rear of the product. If no noise is heard, replace the power supply fan (FM1).
2. If this part has been removed or replaced, check the connector (J33) on the DC controller PCA.
57.00.02: Fan motor 2 (front) malfunction
1. Turn the product off and then on. Listen for fan noise at the front of the product. If no noise is heard, replace the toner cartridge fan (FM2).
2. If this part has been removed or replaced, check the connector (J37) on the DC controller.
57.00.03: Fan motor 3 (fuser) malfunction
1. Turn the product off and then on. Listen for fan noise at the lower back-center of the product. If no noise is heard, replace the fuser fan (FM3).
2. If this part has been removed or replaced, check the connector J37 on the DCC.
58.00.04 Error To continue turn off then on
Description
The low-voltage power supply is defective.
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. Check the connectors (J31 and J32) on the DC controller PCA.
3. If the error persists, replace the low voltage power supply.
59.00.00 Error To continue turn off then on
Description
A paper path malfunction error has occurred.
Recommended action
Turn the product off then on.
228 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
59.00.20 Error To continue turn off then on
Description
A motor rotation error has occurred.
Recommended action
Turn the product off and then on.
59.00.30 Error To continue turn off then on
Description
A fuser motor startup error has occurred.
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. Perform the fuser motor component test in the Troubleshooting menu.
3. Reconnect the connector (J47) on the DC controller PCA.
4. Replace the fuser motor.
59.00.40 Error To continue turn off then on
Description
A fuser motor rotational error has occurred.
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. Perform the fuser motor component test in the Troubleshooting menu.
3. Reconnect the connector (J47) on the DC controller PCA.
4. Replace the fuser motor.
59.05.50 Error To continue turn off then on
Description
The product experienced a drum motor startup error.
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
229
Recommended action
1. Perform the drum-motor component test in the Troubleshooting menu.
2. Use the disable toner cartridge check and run the drum motor component test with the toner cartridge removed. If the test passes, replace the toner cartridge. If the test fails, replace the drum motor.
3. If the product was previously serviced, check the connector at the drum motor assembly and the
DC controller. See the circuit diagram for details.
59.05.60 Error To continue turn off then on
Description
The product experienced a drum motor rotation error.
Recommended action
1. Perform the drum-motor component test in the Troubleshooting menu.
2. Use the disable toner cartridge check and run the drum motor component test with the toner cartridge removed. If the test passes, replace the toner cartridge. If the test fails, replace the drum motor.
3. If the product was previously serviced, check the connector at the drum motor assembly and the
DC controller. See the circuit diagram for details.
60.00.0Y Tray <Y> lifting error
Description
The indicated tray has not lifted into the paper feed position.
Recommended action
60.00.11: Lifter motor failure (M7)
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. Check the connector (J51) on the DC controller PCA.
3. Check the connectors on the lifter motors.
4. Use the tray lifter sensor test in the Tray/ Bin manual sensor test menu to verify that the sensor is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the lifter drive assembly.
5. If the error persists, replace the lifter drive assembly.
62.00.00 No system To continue turn off then on
Description
The product experienced an internal system failure.
230 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. Reload the firmware.
3. Perform a firmware upgrade.
4. If the error persists, replace the hard disk.
69.11.YY Error To continue, touch “OK”
Description
This message displays to indicate an error during a duplex operation.
Recommended action
Turn the product off and then on.
70.00.00 Error To continue turn off then on
Description
The product experienced a DC controller failure.
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. If the error persists, replace the DC controller.
81.WX.YZ Embedded JetDirect Error To continue turn off then on
Description
The product experienced an embedded HP Jetdirect print server critical error.
◦
81.01.00 (event code): EIO Networking Event <UVWXYZ>
◦
81.02.00 (event code): Wireless Networking Event <UVWXYZ>
◦
81.03.00 (event code): Access Point Wireless Networking Event <UVWXYZ>
◦
81.04.00 (event code): Jetdirect Inside Networking Event <UVWXYZ>
◦
81.06.00 (event code): Internal EIO Networking Event <UVWXYZ>
◦
81.07.00 (event code): Internal Wireless Networking Event <UVWXYZ>
◦
81.08.00 (event code): Internal Access Point Wireless Networking Event <UVWXYZ>
◦
81.09.00 (event code): Internal Jetdirect Inside Networking Event <UVWXYZ>
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
231
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. Turn the product off, reseat the EIO accessory, and then turn the product on.
3. If the error persists, replace the formatter.
81.YY.YY EIO Error To continue turn off then on
Description
An external I/O card has failed on the product.
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. Turn the product off, reseat the EIO accessory, and then turn the product on.
3. If the error persists, replace the EIO card.
98.00.0X Corrupt data in X volume
Description
Data corruption has occurred in the firmware volume.
◦
98.00.01 Corrupt data in firmware volume Reinstall firmware
◦
98.00.02 Corrupt data in solutions volume Re-install accessory solutions
◦
98.00.03 Corrupt data in configuration volume Re-configure the product
◦
98.00.04 Corrupt data in job data volume All job data was erased
Recommended action
98.00.01 or 98.00.02 or 98.00.03
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. Use the 1 Clear disk item in the Preboot menu.
3. Reload the firmware.
98.00.04
1. Turn the product off and then on.
2. Rerun the file erase function.
<Binname> full Remove all paper from bin
Description
The specified output bin is full.
232 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Recommended action
Empty the bin to continue printing.
Bad optional tray connection
Description
The optional tray is not connected, not connected correctly, or a connection is not working correctly.
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off.
2. Remove and reinstall the optional tray.
3. Reconnect connectors for the tray.
4. Turn the product on.
Black Cartridge low
Description
The toner cartridge is at the low condition.
Recommended action
Actual supply life remaining may vary. Consider having a replacement available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The supply does not need to be replaced now.
NOTE:
When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection
Warranty ends.
Black Cartridge very low
Description
The toner cartridge has reached the very low condition.
Recommended action
Actual supply life remaining may vary. Consider having a replacement available. The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. Once an HP supply has reached the very low condition, HP's warranty on that supply has ended.
NOTE:
When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection
Warranty ends.
Black Cartridge very low To continue, touch “OK”
Description
The toner cartridge has reached the very low condition.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 233
Recommended action
Actual supply life remaining may vary. Consider having a replacement available. The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. Once an HP supply has reached the very low condition, HP's warranty on that supply has ended.
NOTE:
When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection
Warranty ends.
Card slot device failure To clear touch “Clear”
Description
The specified device has failed.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the error.
Card slot file operation failed To clear touch “Clear”
Description
A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the error.
Card slot file system is full To clear touch “Clear”
Description
A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the error.
Card slot is write protected To clear touch “Clear”
Description
The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the error.
Card slot not initialized To clear touch “Clear”
Description
This file-storage component must be initialized before use.
234 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Recommended action
Use the embedded Web server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the component.
Cartridge ship mode
Description
Manufacturing use only - should not be seen in field.
Recommended action
Contact HP support for steps to resolve this condition.
Chosen personality not available To continue, touch “OK”
Description
A print job requested a product language (personality) that is not available for this product. The job will not print and will be cleared from memory.
Recommended action
Print the job by using a product driver for a different print language, or add the requested language to the product (if possible). To see a list of available personalities, print a configuration page.
Cleaning disk <X>% complete Do not power off
Description
A storage device is being sanitized or cleaned.
Recommended action
Do not turn off the product. The product's functions are unavailable. The product will automatically restart when finished.
Close left door
Description
The left door is open.
Recommended action
1. Close the left door.
2. If the error persists, verify the J35 connector is fully seated on the DC controller PCA.
3. Use the manual sensor test to verify the left-door sensor functionality. If necessary, replace the sensor.
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
235
Close top cover
Description
The cartridge door is open.
Recommended action
1. Close the cartridge door.
2. Make sure that the connectors are fully seated on the cartridge door switch SW3.
3. Make sure that the tab on the cartridge door that activates the switch is not missing or damaged.
Replace the cartridge-door assembly if necessary.
4. Replace the door switch.
Data received
Description
The product is waiting for more data to continue the print job.
Recommended action
Press the OK button to print the last page of the job. To print the existing data, press the Print button.
Disk full Delete stored jobs
Description
The disk is out of storage space and there is not enough space to process any jobs.
Recommended action
◦
Press the View Jobs option to view and delete the stored jobs.
◦
Press the Print option to print and delete stored jobs. Sign in might be required.
The error will automatically clear when there is enough disk space to process jobs.
Disk low Delete stored jobs
Description
The disk is running out of storage space. If the user does not delete stored jobs, the disk will run out of space and there will not be enough space to process any jobs. If the storage space goes lower, an error condition will occur.
Recommended action
◦
Press the View Jobs option to view and delete stored jobs.
◦
Press the Print option to print and delete stored jobs. Sign in might be required.
To increase available disk space, go to Job Status to cancel scheduled jobs.
236 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
EIO <X> disk not functional
Description
The EIO disk in slot indicated is not working correctly.
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off.
2. Remove the EIO disk from the slot indicated.
3. Install a new EIO disk.
4. Turn the product on.
EIO <X> disk spinning up
Description
The EIO disk product in the indicated slot is spinning up. Jobs that require disk access must wait.
◦
X = 1: Slot 1
◦
X = 2: Slot 2
Recommended action
No action is necessary.
EIO device failure To clear touch “Clear”
Description
The specified device failed.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the message.
EIO file operation failed To clear touch “Clear”
Description
A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the message.
EIO file system is full To clear touch “Clear”
Description
A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full.
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
237
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the error.
EIO is write protected To clear touch “Clear”
Description
The device is protected and no new files can be written to it.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the message.
EIO not initialized To clear touch “Clear”
Description
This file-storage component must be initialized before use.
Recommended action
Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system.
Event log is empty
Description
No product events are in the log.
Recommended action
No action is necessary.
Fuser Kit Low
Description
The product indicates when a supply level is low.
Recommended action
Replace the fuser kit.
NOTE:
After replacing the fuser kit, reset the fuser page counter by selecting the New Fuser Kit item in the Reset Supplies sub-menu.
Fuser Kit very low
Description
The product indicates when a supply level is very low.
NOTE:
After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP Premium Protection Warranty for that supply has ended.
238 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Recommended action
Replace the fuser kit.
NOTE:
After replacing the fuser kit, reset the fuser page counter by selecting the New Fuser Kit item in the Reset Supplies sub-menu.
Fuser Kit very low To continue, touch “OK”
Description
The product indicates when a supply level is very low.
NOTE:
After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP Premium Protection Warranty for that supply has ended.
Recommended action
Replace the fuser kit.
NOTE:
After replacing the fuser kit, reset the fuser page counter by selecting the New Fuser Kit item in the Reset Supplies sub-menu.
Incompatible <supply>
Description
The indicated <supply>is not compatible with this product.
◦
10.00.35 (event code): Black toner cartridge
◦
10.23.35 (event code): Fuser kit
Recommended action
Replace the incompatible supply.
Incompatible supplies
Description
The toner cartridge or other supply items are installed that were not designed for this product. The product cannot print with these supplies installed.
Event codes are supply specific.
Recommended action
Press the OK button to identify the incompatible supplies.
Replace the supplies with those that are designed for this product.
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
239
Initializing...
Description
The product is starting.
Recommended action
No action is necessary. Wait until the Ready message appears on the display.
Install Black Cartridge
Description
A supply is either not installed or not correctly installed in the product.
Recommended action
Replace or reinstall the toner cartridge correctly to continue printing.
Install Fuser Unit
Description
The fuser is either not installed or not correctly installed in the product.
Recommended action
CAUTION:
The fuser can be hot while the product is in use.
Reseat the fuser.
Install supplies
Description
More than one supply is missing or is installed incorrectly.
◦
10.00.15 (event code): Black toner cartridge
◦
10.23.15 (event code): Fuser kit
Recommended action
1. Press the OK button to identify which supplies need to be replaced.
2. Press the OK button a second time for more information about the specific supply.
3. Insert the supply item or make sure the installed supply item is fully seated.
Internal disk device failure To clear touch “Clear”
Description
The specified device has failed.
240 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the message.
Internal disk file operation failed To clear touch “Clear”
Description
A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the message.
Internal disk file system is full To clear touch “Clear”
Description
A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the error.
Internal disk is write protected To clear touch “Clear”
Description
The internal disk is protected and no new files can be written to it.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the message.
Internal disk not found
Description
The product cannot find the hard drive.
Recommended action
Check the hard drive cable connections.
Internal disk not functional
Description
The product internal disk is not working correctly.
Recommended action
1. Turn off the product, and then remove and reinstall the disk. Turn on the product.
2. If the error persists, replace the internal hard drive.
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
241
Internal disk not initialized To clear touch “Clear”
Description
This file-storage component must be initialized before use.
Recommended action
Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system.
Internal disk spinning up
Description
Internal disk device is spinning up its platter. Jobs that require disk access must wait.
Recommended action
No action is necessary.
Load Tray 1 [Type] [Size]
Description
Tray 1 is not loaded, but there is not another tray available for the user to use instead.
Recommended action
Load the tray with the requested paper.
Load Tray 1 [Type] [Size] To continue, touch “OK”
Description
Tray 1 is empty.
Recommended action
◦
Load Tray 1 with the requested paper. Or, if paper is already in Tray 1, press the OK button to print.
◦
If paper is in another tray, remove the paper and insert it in Tray 1, and then press the OK button.
Load Tray <X>: [Size]
Description
This message appears even though there is paper loaded in the tray.
Recommended action
1. Load the tray with the requested paper or adjust the paper guides.
2. If the error persists, use the tray paper present sensor test in the Tray/ Bin manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is correctly functioning.
242 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
3. Make sure that the sensor flag on the paper presence sensor is not damaged and moves freely.
4. Reconnect the corresponding connector:
●
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray): Connectors (J1) on the Tray 1 paper out sensor and the connector
(J41) on the DC controller PCA.
●
Input trays: Connectors (J15 and J7) on the tray paper out sensor and the connectors (J43,
J48) on the DC controller PCA.
●
1x500-sheet paper feeder tray: Connector (J752) on the paper feeder tray paper out sensor and the connector (J2003) on the paper feeder controller PCA.
●
3x500-sheet paper feeder tray: Connector (J752, J852, J952) on the paper feeder tray paper out sensor and the connector (J2003) on the paper feeder controller PCA.
●
HCI: Connector (J3201) on the paper feeder tray paper out sensor and the connector (J3005 or J3015) on the HCI controller PCA.
Load Tray <X>: [Size] To continue, touch “OK”
Description
This message appears when the indicated tray is selected but is not loaded, and other paper trays are available for use. It also appears when the tray is configured for a different paper type or size than the print job requires.
Recommended action
1. Load the correct paper in the tray.
2. If prompted, confirm the size and type of paper loaded.
3. Otherwise, press the
OK button to select another tray.
Load Tray <X>: [Size] To use another tray, touch "Options"
Description
This message appears when the indicated tray is selected but is not loaded, and other paper trays are available for use. It also appears when the tray is configured for a different paper type or size than the print job requires.
Recommended action
1. Load the correct paper in the tray.
2. If prompted, confirm the size and type of paper loaded.
3. Otherwise, press the
OK button to select another tray.
Load Tray <X>: [Type], [Size]
Description
This message appears even though there is paper loaded in the tray.
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
243
Recommended action
1. Load the tray with the requested paper or adjust the paper guides.
2. If the error persists, use the tray paper present sensor test in the Tray/ Bin manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is correctly functioning.
3. Make sure that the sensor flag on the paper presence sensor is not damaged and moves freely.
4. Reconnect the corresponding connector:
●
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray): Connector (J1) on the Tray 1 paper out sensor and the connector
(J41) on the DC controller PCA.
●
Input trays: Connectors (J15 and J7) on the tray paper out sensor and the connectors (J43,
J48) on the DC controller PCA.
●
1x500-sheet paper feeder tray: Connector (J752) on the paper feeder tray paper out sensor and the connector (J2003) on the paper feeder controller PCA.
●
3x500-sheet paper feeder tray: Connectors (J752, J852, J952) on the paper feeder tray paper out sensor and the connector (J2003) on the paper feeder controller PCA.
●
HCI: Connector (J3201) on the paper feeder tray paper out sensor and the connector (J3005 or J3015) on the HCI controller PCA.
Load Tray <X>: [Type], [Size] To use another tray, touch "Options"
Description
This message appears when the indicated tray is selected but is not loaded, and other paper trays are available for use. It also appears when the tray is configured for a different paper type or size than the print job requires.
Recommended action
1. Load the correct paper in the tray.
2. If prompted, confirm the size and type of paper loaded.
3. Otherwise, press the OK button to select another tray.
Manually feed output stack Then touch "OK" to print second sides
Description
The product has printed the first side of a manual duplex job and is waiting for the user to insert the output stack to print the second side.
244 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Recommended action
The even-numbered pages of the two-sided document have printed. Follow the next steps to print the odd-numbered pages.
1. Maintaining the same orientation, remove the document from the output bin. Do not discard blank pages.
2. Flip the document over so the printed side is up.
3. Load document in Tray 1.
4. Press the OK button to print the second side of the job.
Manually feed: [Size]
Description
This message appears when manual feed is selected, Tray 1 is not loaded.
Recommended action
Load tray with requested paper.
Manually feed: [Size] To continue, touch “OK”
Description
This message appears when manual feed is selected, Tray 1 is not loaded, and other trays are available.
Recommended action
◦
Load tray with requested paper.
◦
If paper is already in tray, press the Help button to exit the message and then press the OK button to print.
◦
To use another tray, clear paper from Tray 1, press the Help button to exit the message and then press the OK button.
Manually feed: [Size] To use another tray, touch "Options"
Description
This message appears when manual feed is selected, Tray 1 is not loaded, and other trays are available.
Recommended action
◦
Load tray with requested paper.
◦
To use another tray, clear paper from Tray 1, press Options to select a different tray.
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
245
Manually feed: [Type], [Size] To continue, touch “OK”
Description
This message appears when manual feed is selected, Tray 1 is not loaded, and other trays are available.
Recommended action
◦
Load tray with requested paper.
◦
If paper is already in tray, press the Help button to exit the message and then press the OK button to print.
◦
To use another tray, clear paper from Tray 1, press the Help button to exit the message and then press the OK button.
Manually feed: [Type], [Size] To use another tray, touch "Options"
Description
This message appears when manual feed is selected, Tray 1 is not loaded, and other trays are available.
Recommended action
◦
Load tray with requested paper.
◦
To use another tray, clear paper from Tray 1, press Options to select a different tray.
No job to cancel
Description
You have pressed the stop button but the product is not actively processing any jobs.
Recommended action
No action necessary.
Output Bin full
Description
The output bin is full and must be emptied for printing to continue.
Recommended action
1. Empty the bin to continue printing.
2. Make sure that the paper full sensor flag is not damaged and can freely move. If the sensor flag is damaged, replace the top-cover assembly.
246 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
3. Make sure that the connector is fully seated on the sensor and connector J45 is fully seated on the
DC controller.
4. Use the Manual Sensor Test menu items to test the sensor functionality. If necessary, replace the sensor (PS1).
Paperless mode
Description
This is a test mode used in manufacturing and should not be seen on a normally operating product.
Recommended action
Contact HP support for steps to resolve this condition.
Printing Engine Test...
Description
The product is printing an engine test page.
Recommended action
No action is necessary.
Printing stopped To continue, touch “OK”
Description
Time has expired on the print/stop test.
Recommended action
Press the OK button to continue.
RAM Disk device failure To clear touch “Clear”
Description
The specified device failed.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the message.
RAM Disk file operation failed To clear touch “Clear”
Description
A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the message.
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
247
RAM Disk file system is full To clear touch “Clear”
Description
A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the error.
RAM Disk is write protected To clear touch “Clear”
Description
The product is protected and no new files can be written to it.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the message.
RAM Disk not initialized To clear touch “Clear”
Description
The RAM disk file system must be initialized before it can be used.
Recommended action
Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system.
Remove cartridge lock
Description
The product has been turned on with a cartridge shipping lock installed on the toner cartridge.
Recommended action
1. Open the top cover and remove the toner cartridge.
2. Pull the orange tab to remove the strip.
3. Remove the paper with the plastic insert.
4. Reinstall cartridge, and then close the top cover.
Remove the toner cartridge
Description
The product is component testing the belt.
Recommended action
◦
To perform the test, remove the toner cartridge.
◦
To cancel the test, press the Stop button.
248 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Replace Black Cartridge
Description
The black cartridge has reached the out condition.
Recommended action
Install a new toner cartridge.
Replace Fuser Kit
Description
The product indicates when the fuser kit is at its estimated end of life. The actual life remaining might be different than the estimation. Have a replacement fuser kit available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable.
The fuser kit does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable.
NOTE:
After the fuser kit reaches its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection Warranty on that fuser kit ends.
Recommended action
Replace the fuser kit.
WARNING!
The fuser can be hot while the product is in use.
Replace supplies
Description
This alert appears only if the product is configured to stop when a supplies reach the very low threshold. Two or more supplies have reached the estimated end of life. The product indicates when a supply level is at its estimated end of life. The actual life remaining might be different than estimated.
The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable.
HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable.
NOTE:
When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection
Warranty on that supply ends.
Recorded event codes depend on which supplies are at the end of life.
◦
10.00.70 (event code): Black toner cartridge
◦
10.23.70 (event code): Fuser kit
◦
10.22.70 (event code): Transfer kit
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 249
Recommended action
◦
Press the OK button to find out which supplies need to be replaced.
◦
Configure the product to continue printing by using the Manage Supplies menu.
ROM disk device failed To clear touch “Clear”
Description
The specified device failed.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the message.
ROM disk file operation failed To clear touch “Clear”
Description
A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the message.
ROM disk file system is full To clear touch “Clear”
Description
A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the error.
ROM disk is write protected To clear touch “Clear”
Description
The device is protected and no new files can be written to it.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the message.
ROM disk not initialized To clear touch “Clear”
Description
The ROM disk file system must be initialized before it can be used.
Recommended action
Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system.
250 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Size mismatch in Tray <X>
Description
The paper in the listed tray does not match the size specified for that tray.
Recommended action
1. Load the correct paper.
2. Verify that the paper is positioned correctly.
3. Close the tray and verify that the control panel lists the correct paper size and type. Reconfigure the size and type if necessary.
4. If necessary, use the control-panel menus to reconfigure the size and type settings for the specified tray.
5. Make sure that connectors J513, J507, and J501 are fully seated on the high-voltage power supply.
6. Make sure that connector J601 is fully seated on the DC controller PCA.
7. If the error persists, replace the high-voltage power supply.
8. If the error persists, replace the DC controller PCA.
Standard bin full Remove all paper from bin
Description
The specified output bin is full and must be emptied for printing to continue.
Recommended action
Empty the specified output bin.
Supplies low
Description
Multiple supplies on the product have reached the low threshold.
Recommended action
Replace the supply when print quality is no longer acceptable.
NOTE:
When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection
Warranty ends.
Supplies very low To continue, touch “OK”
Description
More than one color supply on the product has reached the very low condition.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 251
Recommended action
◦
Replace the supply when print quality is no longer acceptable.
◦
To continue printing in color, either replace the supply or reconfigure the product by using the
Manage Supplies menu on the control panel.
NOTE:
When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection
Warranty ends.
Supply memory warning
Description
Unable to read cartridge data.
NOTE:
Any repair required as a result of using cartridges with unreadable cartridge data is not covered under warranty.
Recommended action
Replace the cartridge with a genuine HP toner cartridge.
Tray <X> empty: [Size]
Description
The specified tray is empty and needs to be loaded.
Recommended action
Refill the tray.
NOTE:
This could be a false message. If the tray is loaded without removing the shipping lock, the product does not sense that the paper is loaded. Remove the shipping lock, and then load the tray.
Tray <X> empty: [Type], [Size]
Description
The specified tray is empty and needs to be loaded, but the current job does not need this tray to print.
Recommended action
Refill the tray at a convenient time.
NOTE:
This could be a false message. If the tray is loaded without removing the shipping lock, the product does not sense that the paper is loaded. Remove the shipping lock, and then load the tray.
Tray <X> open
Description
The specified tray is open or not closed completely.
252 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Recommended action
1. Close the tray.
2. If this message appears and the lifter-base assembly was removed or replaced, make sure that the connector on the assembly is correctly connected and fully seated.
3. If the error persists, use the paper size switches (SW2,3 - SW82,83 - SW92,93) test in the Tray/
Bin manual sensor test to test the switches. If they do not respond, replace associated the lifter drive assembly.
Tray <X> overfilled Remove excess paper
Description
A tray in the product is overfilled with paper. Printing can continue from a different tray.
Recommended action
Remove enough paper so that the paper stack does not exceed the limit for the tray.
NOTE:
If this message appears and the paper-pickup assembly was removed or replaced, make sure that the connector at the back of the assembly is correctly connected and fully seated.
Tray <X> overfilled To use another tray, touch "Options"
Description
Too much paper was loaded into the indicated tray.
Recommended action
Remove enough paper so that the paper stack does not exceed the limit for the tray or press the
Options button to use another tray.
NOTE:
If this message appears after lifter drive assembly was removed or replaced, make sure that the connector on the assembly is correctly connected and fully seated.
Type mismatch Tray <X>
Description
The specified tray contains a paper type that does not match the configured type.
Recommended action
The specified tray will not be used until this condition is addressed. Printing can continue from other trays.
1. Load the correct paper in the specified tray.
2. At the control panel, verify the type configuration.
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
253
Unable to cancel firmware update job
Description
The product is processing of downloading a remote firmware upgrade and cannot cancel it.
Recommended action
Firmware updates cannot be canceled once started. The product will restart automatically to complete the firmware update.
Unable to install the firmware
Description
The product displays this message when one of the following conditions occurs during a firmware upgrade.
◦
A file I/O error occurs when there is an interruption while reading the firmware upgrade file.
◦
A firmware installation is already in progress, possibly by a remote service application.
◦
A firmware installation is pending.
◦
An internal system failure has occurred while doing firmware upgrades.
◦
An unknown error occurs while doing firmware upgrades.
◦
The memory is full when the user is doing firmware upgrades.
◦
The firmware upgrade file does not support this product.
◦
The upgrade file is invalid or corrupted while doing firmware upgrades.
Recommended action
Refer to the walk-up help for each of these error conditions for specific instructions on resolving the error.
Unsupported drive installed
Description
A non-supported hard drive has been installed. The drive is unusable by this product.
Recommended action
Replace the unsupported drive.
Unsupported supply in use
Description
A non-supported supply has been installed.
254 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Or, the toner cartridge is for a different HP product.
◦
10.00.41 (event code): Black toner cartridge
Recommended action
Install the correct supplies for this product. See the parts chapter in the service manual for supply part numbers.
Unsupported supply installed
Description
The product has one or more HP genuine supplies, designed for a different product, installed. The product will either shut down or slow down unless the user acknowledges the condition.
Recommended action
Press the OK button to continue.
Unsupported supply installed To continue, touch “OK”
Description
One or more genuine HP supplies designed for a different product are installed. These supplies are not supported by the product. The product may either shut down or slow down.
Recommended action
The installed supply was not designed for this product and is not supported. Results may vary when used with this product. To continue printing with the unsupported supply, press the OK button.
Unsupported tray configuration
Description
More than the allowable tray accessories are installed on the product. Printing cannot continue until the extra trays are removed and the product is turned off and then on.
Recommended action
Turn product off and remove the excess tray accessories. Turn the product on.
Unsupported USB accessory detected Remove USB accessory
Description
A non-supported USB accessory has been installed.
Recommended action
Turn the product off, remove the USB accessory, and then turn the product on.
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
255
Upgrade complete To continue turn off then on
Description
The firmware upgrade is complete.
Recommended action
Turn the product off and then on.
USB accessory needs too much power Remove USB and turn off then on
Description
A USB accessory is drawing too much electrical current. Printing cannot continue.
Recommended action
Remove the USB accessory, and then turn the product off and then on.
Use a USB accessory that uses less power or that contains its own power supply.
USB accessory not functional
Description
A USB accessory is not working correctly.
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off.
2. Remove the USB accessory.
3. Insert a replacement USB accessory.
USB hubs are not fully supported Some operations may not work properly
Description
Some USB hubs require more power than the product has available.
Recommended action
Remove the USB hub.
USB is write protected To clear touch “Clear”
Description
The device is protected and no new files can be written to it.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the message.
256 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
USB not initialized To clear touch “Clear”
Description
The USB device file system must be initialized before it can be used.
Recommended action
Use the embedded Web server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the component.
USB storage accessory removed Clearing any associated data
Description
This message displays for six seconds after removal of the USB storage accessory.
Recommended action
Press the Hide button to remove this message.
USB storage device failure To clear touch “Clear”
Description
The specified device failed.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the message.
USB storage file operation failed To clear touch “Clear”
Description
A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the message.
USB storage file system is full To clear touch “Clear”
Description
A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full.
Recommended action
Press the Clear button to clear the error.
Used supply in use
Description
One or more used supplies have been installed.
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
257
Recommended action
◦
Install new supplies.
◦
If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit . Any repair required as a result of using used cartridges is not covered under warranty. Supply status and features depending on supply status are not available.
Used supply installed To continue, touch “OK”
Description
The product displays this message when a used supply (a remanufactured or refilled genuine HP or non-HP product) has been installed.
◦
10.00.34 (event code): Black toner cartridge
Recommended action
◦
Install new supplies.
◦
If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit . Any repair required as a result of using used cartridges is not covered under warranty. Supply status and features depending on supply status are not available.
258 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Event log messages
Some messages appear only in the event log. For additional numeric messages, see the control-panel message section of this manual.
Figure 2-63
Sample event log
Event Log
Page 1
1
2 3 4
5 6 7
8
ENWW
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Product information
Event number
Date and time
Engine cycles
Event log code
Firmware version number
Description of personality
Consecutive Repeats
Tools for troubleshooting 259
Print or view an event log
NOTE:
The event log in using the Administration menu shows only a subset of events. For a complete event log, use the Service menu.
Print or view the event log from the Administration menu
1.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Administration
●
Troubleshooting
3.
Select either View Event Log or Print Event Log, and then press the OK button.
Print or view the event log from the Service menu
1.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Device Maintenance
●
Service
3.
Select the Service Access Code option.
4.
Enter the following service access code for this product: 11071212.
5.
Select either View Event Log or Print Event Log, and then press the OK button.
Clear an event log
1.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Device Maintenance
●
Service
3.
Select the Service Access Code option.
4.
Enter the following service access code for this product: 11071212.
5.
Select the Clear Event Log item, and then press the OK button.
Event log message table
Event log message
30.03.14
Description
Non-fatal error
Action
This is an informational message, and no action is required.
260 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
ENWW
Event log message
99.00.01
99.00.02
99.00.03
99.00.04
99.00.05
99.00.06
99.00.07
99.00.08
99.00.09
99.00.10
99.00.11
99.00.12
Description
Remote firmware upgrade (.bdl) was not performed. The file is corrupt.
Remote firmware upgrade (.bdl) was not performed. Timeout during receipt.
Remote firmware upgrade (.bdl) was not performed. An error occurred when writing to the hard disk.
Remote firmware upgrade (.bdl) was not performed. There was a timeout during the download.
Remote firmware upgrade (.bdl) was not performed. There was an error reading the firmware file.
The firmware upgrade was canceled by the user.
Action
The firmware file is corrupt. Download the firmware file and attempt the upgrade again.
The IO timed out during the firmware download. The most common cause is an issue with the network environment. Ensure a good connection to the product, and attempt the upgrade again or upgrade using the USB walk-up port.
1.
Download the firmware again.
2.
If the error persists, perform the clean disk/format disk process.
3.
Download the firmware from the Preboot menu.
4.
If the error persists, replace the hard disk.
The I/O timed out during the firmware download. The most common cause is an issue with the network environment. Ensure there is a good connection to the product, and attempt the firmware upgrade again or upgrade the firmware using the USB walk-up port.
1.
Download the firmware again.
2.
If the error persists, perform the clean disk/format disk process.
3.
Download the firmware from the Preboot menu.
4.
If the error persists, replace the hard disk.
Resend the firmware upgrade to the product.
The preboot partition is full.
Remote firmware upgrade (.bdl) was not performed. An invalid file was sent.
1.
Download the firmware again.
2.
If the error persists, perform the clean disk/format disk process.
3.
Download the firmware from the Preboot menu.
The firmware file sent was not the correct file.
Download the firmware file again, making sure to download the file for the correct product model. Attempt the upgrade again.
Tools for troubleshooting 261
Event log message
99.00.13
99.00.14
99.00.20
99.00.21
99.00.22
99.00.23
99.00.24
99.00.25
99.00.26
Description
Remote firmware upgrade (.bdl) was not performed. An invalid file was sent.
The bundle is not for this product.
The bundle is not signed with the correct signature, or the signature is invalid.
The bundle header version is not supported by this firmware.
The package header version is not supported by this firmware.
The format of the firmware bundle not correct.
Action
The firmware file sent was not the correct file.
Download the firmware file again, making sure to download the file for the correct product model. Attempt the upgrade again.
Download the firmware file again, and attempt the upgrade again.
262 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Clear jams
General paper jam guidelines
For jams of any type, check the following:
●
Make sure that the paper guides are correctly positioned against the paper.
●
Verify the paper meets the product specifications.
●
Use the control panel or the HP Embedded Web Server to make sure that the tray is configured properly.
Jam locations
2
3
4
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
Duplexer
Fuser jam-access door
Output bin
Top cover (access to the toner cartridge)
Tray 1
Tray 2 jam-access door
Jam-access for the 500-sheet input tray
Auto-navigation for clearing jams
The auto-navigation feature assists you in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the control panel. When you complete a step, the product displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all steps in the procedure.
ENWW Clear jams 263
Clear jams in the output-bin area
1.
If paper is visible from the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it.
Clear jams in Tray 1
1.
Slowly pull the jammed paper out of the product.
2
3
264 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Clear jams in Tray 2 or Tray 3
1.
Open the right-side access door. If the jammed page is visible, gently pull it out of the product.
2.
If you were not able to clear the jam by using the right-side access door, slide the tray out of the product.
2
3
3.
Remove any damaged paper from the tray.
ENWW Clear jams 265
4.
If the edge of the paper is visible in the feed area, slowly pull the paper toward the left side and then out of the product.
NOTE:
Do not force the paper if it will not move easily. If the paper is stuck in a tray, try removing it through the tray above (if applicable) or through the toner-cartridge area.
5.
Close the tray.
NOTE:
Before replacing the tray, make sure the paper is flat in the tray at all four corners and below the tabs on the guides.
6.
Close the right-side access door.
3
2
3
266 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Clear jams in the 500-sheet trays
1.
Open the right-side access door and the 500sheet tray jam-access door.
2.
Remove the 500-sheet tray.
2
3
4
2
3
3.
If the edge of the paper is visible in the feed area, slowly pull the paper toward the right side and out of the product.
NOTE:
Do not force the paper if it will not move easily. If the paper is stuck in a tray, try removing it through the tray above (if applicable) or through the upper, right door.
ENWW
2
3
Clear jams 267
4.
Close the 500-sheet tray.
2
3
5.
Close the right-side access door and the 500sheet tray jam-access door.
2
3
4
Clear jams in the 3,500-sheet high-capacity tray
1.
Open the right and left sides of the tray.
4
268 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
2.
Remove any damaged sheets of paper.
3.
Above the right-side tray, press the green button to release the jam-access plate.
4.
If jammed paper is in the feed area, pull it down to remove it.
4
4
4
ENWW Clear jams 269
5.
Push up on the jam-access plate to close it.
6.
Close the right and left sides of the tray.
4
4
7.
Open the jam-access door on the right side of the high-capacity tray cabinet.
270 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
8.
Lift up the jam-release plate and remove any jammed paper.
9.
Close the jam-access door on the right side of the high-capacity tray cabinet.
Clear jams from the toner-cartridge area
1.
Press the cartridge-door-release button.
ENWW
2
3
Clear jams 271
2.
Open the cartridge door.
3.
Remove the toner cartridge.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes.
4.
Pull the green tab down to open the metal plate inside the product.
2
3
2
3
272 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
5.
Slowly pull the paper out of the product. Be careful to not tear the paper.
CAUTION:
Avoid spilling loose toner. Use a dry, lint-free cloth to clean any toner that might have fallen into the product. If loose toner falls into the product, it might cause temporary problems with print quality. Loose toner should clear from the paper path after a few pages are printed. If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. (Hot water sets toner into fabric.)
6.
Replace the toner cartridge.
7.
Close the cartridge door.
2
3
ENWW
2
3
Clear jams 273
Clear jams in the fuser
1.
Open the fuser door on the left side of the product.
CAUTION:
The fuser can be hot while the product is in use.
2.
Push down on the green tab to open the fuser jam-access cover.
3.
Remove any paper from the fuser.
274 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
4.
Close the fuser jam-access cover.
5.
Close the fuser door.
ENWW Clear jams 275
Clear jams from the duplexer
1.
Remove the duplexer.
2.
Remove any paper from the duplexer.
3.
Reinstall the duplexer.
276 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Solve paper-handling problems
●
The product picks up multiple sheets of paper
●
The product does not pick up paper
The product picks up multiple sheets of paper
If the product picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray, try these solutions.
1.
Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, and flip it over. Do not
fan the paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray.
2.
Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product.
3.
Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different package.
4.
Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.
5.
Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray.
6.
Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications.
The product does not pick up paper
If the product does not pick up paper from the tray, try these solutions.
1.
Open the product and remove any jammed sheets of paper.
2.
Load the tray with the correct size of paper for your job.
3.
Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the product control panel.
4.
Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray.
5.
Check the product control panel to see if the product is waiting for you to acknowledge a prompt to feed the paper manually. Load paper, and continue.
6.
The rollers above the tray might be contaminated. Clean the rollers with a lint-free cloth dampened with warm water.
ENWW Solve paper-handling problems 277
Use manual print modes
Try the following manual print modes to see if they solve the image-quality problems.
Select a manual print mode
1.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Administration
●
General Settings
●
Print Quality
●
Adjust Paper Types
3.
Select a paper type, and then select the mode to adjust.
4.
Select a value for the mode, and then press the OK button.
Table 2-50 Print modes under the Adjust Paper Types sub menu
Print Mode
●
Normal mode
●
Heavy Mode
●
Card Stock Mode
●
Transparency Mode
●
Envelope Control
●
Label Mode
●
Extra Heavy Mode
●
Light Mode
●
Extra Light Mode
●
Rough Mode
●
Bond mode
●
Mid-weight mode
NOTE:
Not all print modes are available for all paper types.
278 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-50 Print modes under the Adjust Paper Types sub menu (continued)
Resistance Mode
Humidity Mode
Set to Up to resolve print-quality issues caused by poor secondary transfer in low-humidity environments with resistive or rough surface paper.
With glossy film, set to High when the product is in a highhumidity environment and print-quality defects occur on HP
Tough Paper or Opaque film.
With transparencies, set to High when the product is in a high-humidity environment and print-quality defects occur on color transparencies on the first page of a print job.
With all other paper types, set to High when the product is in a high-humidity environment and light density occurs on the first page of a print job.
Table 2-51 MP modes under the Optimize submenu
Line Detail
Environment
Restore Optimize
Normal
Up
Off
Set to Low Temp if the product is operating in a lowtemperature environment and you are having problems with print quality such as blisters in the printed image.
Use this item to reset the menu defaults.
ENWW Use manual print modes 279
Print quality troubleshooting tools
Repetitive defects measurements
Use a ruler to measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image quality problems.
Place the ruler next to the first occurrence of the defect on the page. Find the distance between identical defects and use the figure below to identify the component that is causing the defect.
47 mm
48 mm
57 mm
75 mm
79 mm
94 mm
98 mm
Distance between defects
32 mm
38 mm
42 mm
43 mm
44 mm
Product components that cause the defect
Duplex reverse roller or duplex re-pickup roller
Input accessory feed roller
Output roller, intermediate output roller
Fuser output roller
Primary charging roller, cassette separation roller, registration roller, output accessory feed roller 1, re-pickup roller
Transfer roller
Feed roller
Developer roller, output accessory feed roller 2
Fuser film
Pressure sensitive drum, pressure roller
Cassette pickup roller
NOTE:
The primary charging roller, photosensitive drum and developing roller cannot be cleaned. If these rollers are indicated, replace the toner cartridge.
280 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Solve image-quality problems
Image defect examples
These examples identify the most common print-quality problems.
Table 2-52 Image defect examples
Problem Image example Solution
Blank page
Light print (partial page)
1.
The shutter on the toner cartridge might be damaged. Replace the toner cartridge.
2.
The laser scanner shutter on the laser scanner might be damaged. Replace the laser scanner.
3.
The laser scanner might be damaged. Replace the laser scanner.
4.
Poor developing bias with the cartridge contacts. Clean the contact on the toner cartridge.
5.
The high-voltage power supply might be damaged. Replace the high-voltage power supply.
1.
Make sure that the toner cartridge is fully installed.
2.
The toner cartridge might be almost empty. Check the supplies status, and replace the toner cartridge if necessary.
3.
The paper might not meet HP specifications (for example, the paper is too moist or too rough).
Light print (entire page)
1.
Make sure that the toner cartridge is fully installed.
2.
Make sure that the Economode setting is turned off at the control panel and in the print driver. For more information, see the product user guide.
3.
Open the Administration menu at the product control panel. Open the
General Settings menu and then open the Print Quality menu. Increase the Toner density setting.
4.
Try using a different type of paper.
5.
The toner cartridge might be reaching its estimated end of life. Check the supplies status, and replace the toner cartridge if necessary.
ENWW Solve image-quality problems 281
Table 2-52 Image defect examples (continued)
Problem Image example Solution
Specks (front or back of the page is dirty)
Perform the following test
◦
Stop a print job during the print operation before it is complete, then remove the toner cartridge. Open the photosensitive drum shield, and look at the toner image on the drum.
If the image is not fully transferring to the page, replace the transfer roller.
◦
If the toner on the drum is faint, replace the laser scanner.
6.
The transfer roller shaft might be dirty. Remove the transfer roller and clean the shaft to ensure good contact.
7.
If the transfer roller is deformed or damaged, replace the roller.
8.
The high-voltage power supply might be damaged. Replace the high-voltage power supply.
9.
The laser scanner might be damaged. Replace the laser scanner.
If replacing the laser scanner does not resolve the problem and the highvoltage power supply was not replaced (step 8), replace the high-voltage power supply.
Specks might appear on a page after a jam has been cleared.
1.
The paper might be dirty. Use a new package of paper. make sure that the paper is stored correctly. See your product user guide.
2.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
3.
Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser.
4.
Try using a different type of paper.
5.
Check the toner cartridge for leaks. If the toner cartridge is leaking, replace it.
6.
The cassette pickup roller might be dirty. Clean the roller. If it cannot be cleaned, replace the roller.
7.
Repetitive dirt marks can be caused by the registration roller, transfer roller or pressure roller. Use the repetitive defects ruler to identify the problem, and then replace the appropriate assembly.
8.
The media-feed guide, or the fuser-inlet guide might be dirty. Clean the guide.
9.
The delivery rollers might be dirty. Clean the rollers.
282 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-52 Image defect examples (continued)
Problem Image example Solution
Dropouts
Lines
A
A
A
A
A a a a a a
B
B
B
B
B b b b b b
C c c c c
C
C
C
C c
1.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
2.
Try using a smoother paper.
3.
If the transfer roller is deformed or damaged, replace the roller.
4.
The high-voltage contact of the static eliminator with the toner cartridge might be dirty. Clean the contact.
5.
The photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, or developing roller might be damaged. Replace the toner cartridge.
6.
The fuser film might be scratched or dirty. Replace the fuser.
7.
The high-voltage power supply might be damaged. Replace the high-voltage power supply.
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser.
3.
The photosensitive drum might be scratched. Replace the toner cartridge.
4.
The fuser-inlet guide might be dirty. Clean the guide.
5.
The fuser film might be scratched. Replace the fuser.
Horizontal lines
1.
The photosensitive drum might be scratched. Replace the toner cartridge.
2.
The fuser film might be dirty or damaged. Replace the fuser.
A a a a a
A
A
A
A a
B
B
B
B
B b b b b b
C
C
C
C
C c c c c c
ENWW Solve image-quality problems 283
Table 2-52 Image defect examples (continued)
Problem Image example Solution
Gray background (image is obviously dark)
Toner smear
1.
Do not use paper that has already been run through the product.
2.
Try using a different type of paper.
3.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
4.
Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.
5.
Open the Administration menu at the product control panel. Open the
General Settings menu and then open the Print Quality menu. Increase the Toner density setting.
6.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
7.
The toner cartridge might need to be replaced.
8.
The print-cartridge ground or bias contacts might be dirty. Clean the contacts.
9.
Stop a print job before it is complete, and then remove the toner cartridge.
Open the photosensitive drum shield, and look at the toner image on the drum.
◦
◦
If the image is not fully transferring to the page, replace the transfer roller.
If the toner on the drum is faint, replace the laser scanner.
10.
The high-voltage power supply might be damaged. Replace the high-voltage power supply.
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Try using a different type of paper.
3.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
4.
Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser.
5.
The toner cartridge might need to be replaced.
Loose toner Loose toner, in this context, is defined as toner that can be rubbed off the page.
1.
If you have observed a rougher texture on one side of your paper, try printing on the smoother side.
2.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
3.
Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide.
4.
The pressure roller is dirty, the fuser film is scratched, or a foreign substance is on the fuser film. Use the Print Fuser Test Page option in the
Troubleshooting menu to test the fuser. If the error persists, replace the fuser.
284 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-52 Image defect examples (continued)
Problem Image example Solution
Repeat defects
Repeat image
Misformed characters
Page skew
Dear Mr. Abhjerhjk,
The dhjhfiuhu if teint hhkjhjnf j us a weue jd, fnk ksneh vnk kjdfkaakd ss hsjhnckkajhdhf kashfhnduujdn.
Pkshkkhklhlkhkhyufwe4yrh9jjflkln djd skshkshdcnksnjcnal aksnclnslskjlncsl nas lnslna, ncnsljsjscljckn nsnclknsllj hwlsdknls nwljs nlnscl nijhsn clsncij hn. Iosi fsjs jlkh andjna this is a hn. jns fir stie a djakjd ajjssk. Thsi ius vnvlu tyeh lch afted, and when hghj hgjhk jdj a dt sonnleh.
Suolklv jsdj hvjkrt ten sutc of jthjkfjkn vjdj hwjd, an olk d
.at fhjdjht ajshef. Sewlfl nv atug ahgjfjknvr kdkjdh sj hvjk sjskrplo book. Camegajd sand their djnln as orged tyehha as as hf hv of the tinhgh in the cescmdal vlala tojk. Ho sn shj shjkh a sjca kvkjn? No ahdkj ahhtuah ahavjnv hv vh aefve r
Tehreh ahkj vaknihidh was skjsaa a dhkjfn anj cjkhapsldnlj llhfoihrfhthej ahjkkjna oa h j a kah w asj kskjnk as sa fjkank cakajhjkn eanjsdn qa ejhc pjtpvjlnv4purlaxnwl. Ana l, and the askeina of ahthvnasm. Sayhvjan tjhhjhr ajn ve fh k v nja vkfkahjd a. Smakkljl a sehiah adheufh if you do klakc k w vka ah call lthe cjakha aa d a sd fijs.
Sincerely,
Mr. Scmehnjcj
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser.
3.
Use the repetitive defect ruler to determine if the defect is caused by the fuser or the toner cartridge.
◦
◦
If the toner cartridge is causing the defect, run the print/stop test at the
500 msec setting. If the test shows a defect, replace the toner cartridge.
Use the Print Fuser Test Page option in the Troubleshooting menu to test the fuser. If the error persists, replace the fuser.
This type of defect might occur when using preprinted forms or a large quantity of narrow paper. Verify that the preprinted ink used on forms meet HP specifications for use in laser printers.
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide.
3.
Verify that the product is configured for the correct paper type.
4.
Use the Print Fuser Test Page option in the Troubleshooting menu to test the fuser. If the error persists, replace the fuser.
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
3.
Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide.
4.
The laser scanner wire connectors might have poor contact. Reconnect the connectors (J1900 and J801).
5.
The laser scanner might be damaged. Replace the laser scanner.
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Verify that no torn pieces of paper are inside the product.
3.
Make sure that paper is loaded correctly and that all adjustments have been made. Make sure that the guides in the tray are not too tight or too loose against the paper.
4.
Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.
5.
Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide.
6.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
ENWW Solve image-quality problems 285
Table 2-52 Image defect examples (continued)
Problem Image example Solution
Curl or wave
1.
Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.
2.
Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide.
3.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
4.
Try printing to a different output bin.
Wrinkles or creases
Vertical white lines
Horizontal white lines
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
3.
Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.
4.
Make sure that paper is loaded correctly and all adjustments have been made. For more information, see the product user guide.
5.
Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. See the product user guide.
6.
If envelopes are creasing, try storing envelopes so that they lie flat.
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide.
3.
The photosensitive drum might be scratched, or the developing roller might be damaged. Replace the toner cartridge.
4.
The laser beam window might be dirty. Clean the laser beam window on the laser scanner.
5.
The fuser inlet guide might be dirty. Clean the guide.
6.
The fuser film might be scratched or dirty. Replace the fuser.
7.
The laser scanner might be damaged. Replace the laser scanner.
1.
The photosensitive drum might be scratched, or the developing roller might be damaged. Replace the toner cartridge.
2.
The fuser film might be damaged. Replace the fuser.
Black page
1.
The toner-cartridge ground or bias contacts might be dirty. Clean the contacts.
2.
The primary charging roller might be defective. Replace the toner cartridge.
3.
The high-voltage power supply might be damaged. Replace the high-voltage power supply.
286 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Table 2-52 Image defect examples (continued)
Problem Image example Solution
Tire tracks
A
A
A
A
A a a a a a
B
B
B
B
B b b b b b C c c c c
C
C
C
C c
This defect typically occurs when the toner cartridge has far exceeded its estimated life. For example, if you are printing a very large quantity of pages with very little toner coverage.
1.
The toner cartridge might need to be replaced.
2.
Reduce the number of pages that you print with very low toner coverage.
White spots on black or in the image
Scattered lines
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide.
3.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
4.
The toner cartridge might need to be replaced.
5.
If the transfer roller is deformed or damaged, replace the roller.
6.
The transfer roller shaft might be dirty (poor contact). Remove the transfer roller and clean the shaft.
7.
The high-voltage power supply might be damaged. Replace the high-voltage power supply.
1.
Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide.
2.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
3.
Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.
4.
Change the toner density. Open the Administration menu at the product control panel. Open the General Settings menu and then open the Print
Quality menu. Change the Toner density setting.
5.
Open the Administration menu at the product control panel. Open the
General Settings menu and then open the Print Quality menu. Open the
Optimize menu and set the Line Detail setting to Up.
ENWW Solve image-quality problems 287
Table 2-52 Image defect examples (continued)
Problem Image example Solution
Blurred print
Random image repetition
1.
Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide.
2.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
3.
Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.
4.
Do not use paper that already has been run through the product.
5.
Decrease the toner density. Open the Administration menu at the product control panel. Open the General Settings menu and then open the Print
Quality menu. Decrease the Toner density setting.
If an image that appears at the top of the page (in solid black) repeats further down the page (in a gray field), the toner might not have been completely erased from the last job. (The repeated image might be lighter or darker than the field it appears in.)
●
Change the tone (darkness) of the field that the repeated image appears in.
●
Change the order in which the images are printed. For example, have the lighter image at the top of the page, and the darker image farther down the page.
●
From your software program, rotate the whole page 180° to print the lighter image first.
●
If the defect occurs later in a print job, turn the product off for 10 minutes, and then turn it on to restart the print job.
288 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Clean the product
Over time, particles of toner and paper accumulate inside the product. This can cause print-quality problems during printing. Cleaning the product eliminates or reduces these problems.
Clean the paper path and print-cartridge areas every time that you change the toner cartridge or whenever print-quality problems occur. As much as possible, keep the product free from dust and debris.
To clean the product exterior, use a soft, water-moistened cloth.
Print a cleaning page
Print a cleaning page to remove dust and excess toner from the paper path if you are having any of the following problems:
●
Specks of toner are on the printed pages.
●
Toner is smearing on the printed pages.
●
Repeated marks occur on the printed pages.
Use the following procedure to print a cleaning page.
1.
On the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Device Maintenance
●
Calibration/Cleaning
●
Print Cleaning Page
3.
The cleaning process can take several minutes. When it is finished, discard the printed page.
ENWW Clean the product 289
Solve performance problems
Table 2-53 Solve performance problems
Problem
Pages print but are totally blank.
Pages print very slowly.
Pages did not print.
Cause
The document might contain blank pages.
The product might be malfunctioning.
Solution
Check the document that you are printing to see if content displays on all of the pages.
To check the product, print a configuration page.
Print on a different type of paper.
Heavier paper types can slow the print job.
Complex pages can print slowly.
Large batches, narrow paper, and special paper such as gloss, transparency, cardstock, and HP Tough
Paper can slow the print job.
The product might not be pulling paper correctly.
The paper is jamming in the product.
The USB cable might be defective or incorrectly connected.
Other devices are running on your computer.
Proper fusing might require a slower print speed to ensure the best print quality.
Print in smaller batches, on a different type of paper, or on a different size of paper.
Make sure paper is loaded in the tray correctly.
Clear the jam.
●
Disconnect the USB cable at both ends and reconnect it.
●
Try printing a job that has printed in the past.
●
Try using a different USB cable.
The product might not share a USB port.
If you have an external hard drive or network switchbox that is connected to the same port as the product, the other device might be interfering. To connect and use the product, you must disconnect the other device or you must use two USB ports on the computer.
290 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Solve connectivity problems
Solve USB connection problems
If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the cable.
●
Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product.
●
Verify that the cable is not longer than 2 m (6.65 ft). Try using a shorter cable.
●
Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product. Replace the cable if necessary.
Solve wired network problems
Check the following items to verify that the product is communicating with the network. Before beginning, print a configuration page from the product control panel and locate the product IP address that is listed on this page.
●
The product has a poor physical connection.
●
The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product
●
The computer is unable to communicate with the product
●
The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
●
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems
●
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly
●
The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect
The product has a poor physical connection.
1.
Verify that the product is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length.
2.
Verify that cable connections are secure.
3.
Look at the network port connection on the back of the product, and verify that the amber activity light and the green link-status light are lit.
4.
If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the hub.
The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product
1.
Open the printer properties and click the Ports tab. Verify that the current IP address for the product is selected. The product IP address is listed on the product configuration page.
2.
If you installed the product using the HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box labeled Always
print to this printer, even if its IP address changes.
ENWW Solve connectivity problems 291
3.
If you installed the product using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the hostname instead of the IP address.
4.
If the IP address is correct, delete the product and then add it again.
The computer is unable to communicate with the product
1.
Test network communication by pinging the product.
a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer. For Windows, click Start, click Run, and then type cmd.
b. Type ping followed by the IP address for your product.
c.
If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.
2.
If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network settings, the product, and the computer are all configured for the same network.
The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
Hewlett-Packard recommends leaving this setting in automatic mode (the default setting). If you change these settings, you must also change them for your network.
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems
Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct print driver.
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly
1.
Check the network drivers, print drivers, and the network redirection.
2.
Verify that the operating system is configured correctly.
The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect
1.
Review the configuration page to check the status of the network protocol. Enable it if necessary.
2.
Reconfigure the network settings if necessary.
292 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Service mode functions
Service menu
The Service menu is PIN-protected for added security. Only authorized service people have access to the Service menu. When you select Service from the list of menus, the product prompts you to type an eight-digit personal identification number (PIN).
NOTE:
The product automatically exits the Service menu after about one minute if no items are selected or changed.
1.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the Device Maintenance button.
3.
Open the Service menu.
4.
Select the Service Access Code option.
5.
Enter the following service access code for this product: 11071212, and then press the
OK button.
The following menu items appear in the Service menu:
First level
Print Event Log
View Event Log
Clear Event Log
Second level Value Description
Allows you to print or view the product event log.
Cycle Counts Total Engine Cycles
Refurbish Cycle Count
Use this item to clear the product event log.
Set the page count that was stored in NVRAM prior to installing a new formatter.
Use this item to record the page count when the product was refurbished.
Serial Number
Service ID
Maintenance Kit Count
Maintenance Kit Interval
Set the serial number.
Use this item to show the date that the product was first used on the control panel. This eliminates the need for users to keep paper receipts for proof of warranty.
ENWW Service mode functions 293
First level
Cold Reset Paper
Second level
Continuous Print from USB
Value Description
When you perform a cold reset, the paper size that is stored in
NVRAM is reset to the default factory setting. If you replace a formatter board in a country/ region that uses A4 as the standard paper size, use this menu to reset the default paper size to A4.
LETTER and A4 are the only available values.
Test Support
Product resets
Restore factory-set defaults
1.
On the product control panel, press the Home button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Administration
●
General Settings
●
Restore Factory Settings
3.
Select the Reset option, and then press the OK button.
Restore the service ID
Restore the service ID
If you replace the formatter, the date is lost. Use this menu item to reset the date to the original date that the product was first used. The date format is YYDDD. Use the following formula to calculate the dates:
1.
To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year. For instance, if the product was first used in 2002, calculate YY as follows: 2002 - 1990 = 12. YY = 12.
2.
Subtract 1 from 10 (October is the tenth month of the year): 10 - 1 = 9.
●
Multiply 9 by 30: 9 x 30 = 270 or add 17 to 270: 270 + 17 = 287. Thus, DDD = 287.
294 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Convert the service ID to an actual date
You can use the product Service ID number to determine whether the product is still under warranty.
Use the following formula to convert the Service ID into the installation date as follows:
1.
Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the product was installed.
2.
Divide DDD by 30. If there is a remainder, add 1 to the result. This is the month.
3.
The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date.
Using the Service ID 12287 as an example, the date conversion is as follows:
1.
12 + 1990 = 2002, so the year is 2002.
2.
287 divided by 30 = 9 with a remainder of 17. Because there is a remainder, add 1 to 9 to get
10, which represents October.
3.
The remainder in step 2 is 17, so that is the date.
4.
The complete date is 17-October-2002.
NOTE:
A six-day grace period is built into the date system.
Product cold reset
Cold reset using the Preboot menu
1.
Turn the product on.
2.
Press the Stop button when the Ready, Data, and Attention LEDs are illuminated solid until the
Preboot menu opens.
NOTE:
The window for accessing the Preboot menu, while the Ready, Data, and Attention LEDs are illuminated solid, is around one second. You can press the button repeatedly while the product is starting up to make you sure you gain access to the Preboot menu.
3.
Use the down arrow button to highlight the 3 Administrator item, and then press the OK button.
4.
Use the down arrow button to highlight the 8 Startup Options item, and then press the OK button.
5.
Use the down arrow button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then press the OK button.
6.
Select the 1 Continue item, and then press the OK button.
NOTE:
The product will initialize.
ENWW Service mode functions 295
Format Disk and Partial Clean functions
Active and repository firmware locations
The firmware bundle consists of multiple parts. The main components are the Windows CE Operating
System and the product/peripheral firmware files.
There are two locations/partitions on the hard drive where the firmware components are stored:
●
The Active – where the Operating System and firmware currently are executing
●
The Repository – the recovery location
If the Active location is damaged, or a 3 Partial Clean was performed, the product automatically copies over the OS and firmware files from the Repository location and the product recovers.
If both the Active and Repository locations are damaged, or a 2 Format Disk was performed, then both locations are gone and the error message 99.09.67 displays on the control-panel display. The user must upload the firmware to the product in order for it to function again.
CAUTION:
The 2 Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be completely lost. HP does not recommend this action with out first contacting support.
Partial Clean
The 3 Partial Clean option erases all partitions and data on the disk drive, except for the firmware repository where a backup copy of the firmware file is stored. This allows the disk drive to be reformatted without having to download a firmware upgrade file to return the product to a bootable state.
Characteristics of a partial clean
●
Customer-defined settings, third-party solutions, firmware files, and the operating system are deleted.
●
Rebooting the product restores the firmware files from the Repository location, but does not restore any customer-defined settings.
●
For previous HP products, a Hard Disk Initialization is similar to executing the 3 Partial Clean function for this product.
CAUTION:
HP recommends backing-up product configuration data before executing a 3 Partial
Clean if you need to retain customer-defined settings. See the Backup/Restore item in the Device
Maintenance menu.
Reasons for performing partial clean
●
The product continually boots up in an error state.
NOTE:
Try clearing the error prior to executing a 3 Partial Clean.
●
The product will not respond to commands from the control panel.
296 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
●
Executing the 3 Partial Clean function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems.
●
To reset the product by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings.
●
The product default settings are not properly working.
Execute a 3 Partial Clean
1.
Turn the product on.
2.
Press the Stop button when the Ready, Data, and Attention LEDs are illuminated solid until the
Preboot menu opens.
Touch the HP logo that displays in the center of the touchscreen until the Preboot menu opens.
3.
Use the down arrow button to highlight the 3 Administrator item, and then press the OK button.
4.
Use the down arrow button to highlight the 3 Partial Clean item, and then press the OK button.
5.
Press the OK button again.
6.
Select the 1 Continue item, and then press the OK button.
NOTE:
The product initializes.
Format Disk
The 2 Format Disk option erases the entire disk drive.
CAUTION:
After executing a 2 Format Disk option, the product is not bootable.
Characteristics of a format disk
●
Customer-defined settings, third-party solutions, firmware files, and the operating system are deleted.
NOTE:
Rebooting the product does not restore the firmware files.
●
Rebooting the product restores the firmware files from the Repository location, but does not restore any customer-defined settings.
●
After executing the 2 Format Disk function, the message 99.09.67 displays on the control panel.
●
After executing the 2 Format Disk function, the product firmware must be reloaded.
ENWW Service mode functions 297
CAUTION:
HP recommends that you do not use the 2 Format Disk option unless an error occurs and the solution in the product service manual recommends this solution. After executing the 2 Format
Disk function, the product is unusable.
HP recommends backing-up product configuration data before executing a 2 Format Disk if you need to retain customer-defined settings. See the Backup/Restore item in the Device
Maintenance menu.
Reasons for performing a format disk
●
The product continually boots up in an error state.
NOTE:
Try clearing the error prior to executing a 2 Format Disk.
●
The product will not respond to commands from the control panel.
●
Executing the 2 Format Disk function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems.
●
To reset the product by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings.
Execute a 2 Format Disk
1.
Turn the product on.
2.
Touch the HP logo that displays in the center of the touchscreen until the Preboot menu opens.
Press the Stop button when the Ready, Data, and Attention LEDs are illuminated solid until the
Preboot menu opens.
3.
Use the down arrow button to highlight the 3 Administrator item, and then press the OK button.
4.
Use the down arrow button to highlight the 2 Format Disk item, and then press the OK button.
5.
Press the OK button again.
NOTE:
When the 2 Format Disk operation is complete, you will need to reload the product firmware.
298 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
Product firmware upgrades
To download the most recent firmware upgrade for the product, go to www.hp.com/go/ lj700M712_firmware .
Determine the installed revision of firmware
Print a configuration page to determine the installed revision of firmware.
On the configuration page, look in the section marked Device Information for the firmware datecode and firmware revision.
Firmware datecode and firmware revision examples
●
20100831 (firmware datecode)
●
103067_104746 (firmware revision)
Perform a firmware upgrade
The firmware bundle is a xxxxxxx.bdl file. This file requires an interactive upgrade method. You cannot upgrade the product using the traditional FTP, LPR or Port 9100 methods of upgrading. Use one of the following methods to upgrade the firmware for this product.
Embedded Web Server
1.
Open an browser window.
2.
Enter the product IP address in the URL line.
3.
Select the Firmware upgrade link from within the Troubleshooting tab.
NOTE:
If you get a warning screen, follow the instructions for setting an administrator password from the Security tab.
4.
Browse to the location that the firmware upgrade file was downloaded to, and then select the firmware file. Select the Install button to perform the upgrade.
NOTE:
Do not close the browser window until the Embedded Web Server (EWS) displays the confirmation page.
5.
Select Restart Now from the EWS confirmation page, or turn the product off, and then on again using the power switch.
ENWW Product firmware upgrades 299
USB storage device (Preboot menu)
1.
Copy the firmware upgrade file to the root directory of a USB flash drive. The firmware upgrade file has a .bdl extension.
2.
Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the product control panel.
3.
Turn the product on.
4.
Open the preboot menu.
a. Turn the product on.
b. Wait for both the Ready and Attention LEDs at the bottom right side of the control panel to illuminate and then dim out. The HP logo will appear on the control panel display.
c.
Press the Stop button when the Ready, Data, and Attention LEDs are illuminated solid until the Preboot menu opens.
NOTE:
The period of time for accessing the preboot menu is around one second. You may need to press the Stop button repeatedly while the product is starting up to make you sure you gain access to the preboot menu.
d. Use the down arrow arrow button to navigate the preboot menu options.
e. Press the OK button to select a menu item.
5.
Wait for the Preboot menu to appear on the control-panel display, and then press the down arrow
button to scroll to Administrator. Press the OK button to select it.
6.
Press thedown arrow button to scroll to Manage Disk. Press the OK button to select it.
7.
Press the down arrow button to scroll to Clear Disk Pwd. Press the OK button to select it.
8.
The message Proceed with Requested Action displays. Press the OK button.
9.
Press the back arrow button to return to the Preboot menu home screen.
10.
Press the down arrow button to scroll to Administrator. Press the OK button to select it.
11.
Press thedown arrow button to scroll to Download. Press the OK button to select it.
12.
Press the down arrow button to scroll to USB Thumbdrive. Press the OK button to select it.
13.
Several .bdl files might be listed. Press thedown arrow button to scroll to the firmware upgrade file that you downloaded. Press the OK button to select it.
NOTE:
If no .bdl files are listed, try saving the file to a different USB flash drive
300 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
14.
Wait while the file transfers. When the transfer is complete, the message Complete displays on the screen.
15.
Turn the product off, remove the USB flash drive, and then turn the product on. Wait for several minutes while the product initializes.
●
If the upgrade is unsuccessful, try sending the firmware upgrade file again.
●
If the upgrade fails again, contact HP support at www.hp.com/support/lj700M712 .
ENWW Product firmware upgrades 301
USB storage device (control-panel menu)
1.
Copy the xxxxxxx.bdl file to a portable USB flash drive.
2.
Turn the product on, and then wait until it reaches the Ready state.
3.
At the product control panel, press the Home button.
4.
Open the Device Maintenance menu.
5.
Select the USB Firmware Upgrade item, and then press the OK button.
6.
Insert the portable USB storage device with the xxxxxxx.bdl file on it into the USB port on the front of the product, and then press the OK button.
7.
Select the xxxxxxx.bdl file, and then press the OK button.
TIP:
If there is more than one xxxxxxx.bdl file on the storage device, make sure that you select the correct file for this product.
8.
When the product prompts you to confirm the upgrade, press the OK button.
When the upgrade is complete, the product will initialize.
NOTE:
The upgrade process can take up to 10 minutes to complete.
9.
When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade firmware version was installed.
302 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW
A Service and support
●
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
●
HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement
●
●
●
Data stored on the toner cartridge
●
●
●
Customer self-repair warranty service
●
ENWW 303
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
HP PRODUCT
HP LaserJet Enterprise 700 M712n, M712dn, M712xh
DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY
One-year on-site warranty
HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new.
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use.
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country/region to country/region, state to state, or province to province.
HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE
YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR
ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED
IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
304 Appendix A Service and support ENWW
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY
PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE
MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
ENWW Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement 305
HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement
This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship.
This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refilled, refurbished, remanufactured or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use.
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP's option, HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE
FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR
OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY
PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE
MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
306 Appendix A Service and support ENWW
HP policy on non-HP supplies
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP toner cartridges, either new or remanufactured.
NOTE:
For HP printer products, the use of a non-HP toner cartridge or a refilled toner cartridge does not affect either the warranty to the customer or any HP support contract with the customer. However, if product failure or damage is attributable to the use of a non-HP toner cartridge or refilled toner cartridge, HP will charge its standard time and materials charges to service the product for the particular failure or damage.
ENWW HP policy on non-HP supplies 307
HP anticounterfeit Web site
Go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit when you install an HP toner cartridge and the control-panel message says the cartridge is non-HP. HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem.
Your toner cartridge might not be a genuine HP toner cartridge if you notice the following:
●
The supplies status page indicates that a non-HP supply is installed.
●
You are experiencing a high number of problems with the cartridge.
●
The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the packaging differs from
HP packaging).
308 Appendix A Service and support ENWW
Data stored on the toner cartridge
The HP toner cartridges used with this product contain a memory chip that assists in the operation of the product.
In addition, this memory chip collects a limited set of information about the usage of the product, which might include the following: the date when the toner cartridge was first installed, the date when the toner cartridge was last used, the number of pages printed using the toner cartridge, the page coverage, the printing modes used, any printing errors that might have occurred, and the product model. This information helps HP design future products to meet our customers' printing needs.
The data collected from the toner cartridge memory chip does not contain information that can be used to identify a customer or user of the toner cartridge or their product.
HP collects a sampling of the memory chips from toner cartridges returned to HP's free return and recycling program (HP Planet Partners: www.hp.com/recycle ). The memory chips from this sampling are read and studied in order to improve future HP products. HP partners who assist in recycling this toner cartridge might have access to this data, as well.
Any third party possessing the toner cartridge might have access to the anonymous information on the memory chip.
ENWW Data stored on the toner cartridge 309
End User License Agreement
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT: This End-User License
Agreement (“EULA”) is a contract between (a) you (either an individual or the entity you represent) and
(b) Hewlett-Packard Company (“HP”) that governs your use of the software product (“Software”). This
EULA does not apply if there is a separate license agreement between you and HP or its suppliers for the Software, including a license agreement in online documentation. The term “Software” may include
(i) associated media, (ii) a user guide and other printed materials, and (iii) “online” or electronic documentation (collectively “User Documentation”).
RIGHTS IN THE SOFTWARE ARE OFFERED ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU AGREE TO ALL
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA. BY INSTALLING, COPYING, DOWNLOADING, OR
OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT
ACCEPT THIS EULA, DO NOT INSTALL, DOWNLOAD, OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE. IF
YOU PURCHASED THE SOFTWARE BUT DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA, PLEASE RETURN THE
SOFTWARE TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE WITHIN FOURTEEN DAYS FOR A REFUND OF THE
PURCHASE PRICE; IF THE SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED ON OR MADE AVAILABLE WITH ANOTHER
HP PRODUCT, YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT.
1.
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. The Software may include, in addition to HP proprietary software (“HP
Software”), software under licenses from third parties (“Third Party Software” and “Third Party
License”). Any Third Party Software is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the corresponding Third Party License. Generally, the Third Party License is in a file such as
“license.txt” or a “readme” file. You should contact HP support if you cannot find a Third Party
License. If the Third Party Licenses include licenses that provide for the availability of source code
(such as the GNU General Public License) and the corresponding source code is not included with the Software, then check the product support pages of HP's website (hp.com) to learn how to obtain such source code.
2.
LICENSE RIGHTS. You will have the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA:
a. Use. HP grants you a license to Use one copy of the HP Software. “Use” means installing, copying, storing, loading, executing, displaying, or otherwise using the HP Software. You may not modify the HP Software or disable any licensing or control feature of the
HP Software. If this Software is provided by HP for Use with an imaging or printing product
(for example, if the Software is a printer driver, firmware, or add-on), the HP Software may only be used with such product (“HP Product”). Additional restrictions on Use may appear in the User Documentation. You may not separate component parts of the HP Software for Use.
You do not have the right to distribute the HP Software.
b. Copying. Your right to copy means you may make archival or back-up copies of the
HP Software, provided each copy contains all the original HP Software’s proprietary notices and is used only for back-up purposes.
3.
UPGRADES. To Use HP Software provided by HP as an upgrade, update, or supplement
(collectively “Upgrade”), you must first be licensed for the original HP Software identified by HP as eligible for the Upgrade. To the extent the Upgrade supersedes the original HP Software, you may no longer use such HP Software. This EULA applies to each Upgrade unless HP provides other terms with the Upgrade. In case of a conflict between this EULA and such other terms, the other terms will prevail.
310 Appendix A Service and support ENWW
ENWW
4.
TRANSFER.
a. Third Party Transfer. The initial end user of the HP Software may make a one-time transfer of the HP Software to another end user. Any transfer will include all component parts, media,
User Documentation, this EULA, and if applicable, the Certificate of Authenticity. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the transferred Software will agree to this EULA. Upon transfer of the HP Software, your license is automatically terminated.
b. Restrictions. You may not rent, lease or lend the HP Software or Use the HP Software for commercial timesharing or bureau use. You may not sublicense, assign or otherwise transfer the HP Software except as expressly provided in this EULA.
5.
PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. All intellectual property rights in the Software and User Documentation are owned by HP or its suppliers and are protected by law, including applicable copyright, trade secret, patent, and trademark laws. You will not remove any product identification, copyright notice, or proprietary restriction from the Software.
6.
LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the HP Software, except and only to the extent that the right to do so is allowed under applicable law.
7.
CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. HP and its affiliates may collect and use technical information you provide in relation to (i) your Use of the Software or the HP Product, or (ii) the provision of support services related to the Software or the HP Product. All such information will be subject to HP’s privacy policy. HP will not use such information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary to enhance your Use or provide support services.
8.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Notwithstanding any damages that you might incur, the entire liability of HP and its suppliers under this EULA and your exclusive remedy under this EULA will be limited to the greater of the amount actually paid by you for the Product or U.S. $5.00. TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,
PERSONAL INJURY, OR LOSS OF PRIVACY) RELATED IN ANY WAY TO THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF HP OR ANY SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND EVEN IF THE ABOVE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. Some states or other jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
9.
U.S. GOVERNMENT CUSTOMERS. Software was developed entirely at private expense. All
Software is commercial computer software within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to US FAR 48 CFR 12.212 and DFAR 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure of the Software by or for the U.S. Government or a U.S. Government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in this End User License
Agreement, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable mandatory federal laws.
10.
COMPLIANCE WITH EXPORT LAWS. You will comply with all laws, rules, and regulations (i) applicable to the export or import of the Software, or (ii) restricting the Use of the Software, including any restrictions on nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons proliferation.
11.
RESERVATION OF RIGHTS. HP and its suppliers reserve all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.
End User License Agreement 311
© 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
Rev. 04/09
312 Appendix A Service and support ENWW
OpenSSL
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
ENWW OpenSSL 313
Customer self-repair warranty service
HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period,
HP identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement. There are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory. If you request HP to replace these parts, you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service. 2) Parts for which customer self repair is optional. These parts are also designed for Customer Self Repair. If, however, you require that HP replace them for you, this may be done at no additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product.
Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts will be shipped for next business day delivery. Same-day or four-hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography permits. If assistance is required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the phone. HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether a defective part must be returned to HP. In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP, you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time, normally five (5) business days. The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material. Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement. With a customer self repair, HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier/carrier to be used.
314 Appendix A Service and support ENWW
Customer support
Get telephone support for your country/region
Have the product name, serial number, date of purchase, and problem description ready.
Get 24-hour Internet support
Download software utilities, drivers, and electronic information
Order additional HP service or maintenance agreements
Register your product
Country/region phone numbers are on the flyer that was in the box with your product or at www.hp.com/support/ .
www.hp.com/support/lj700M712 www.hp.com/go/lj700M712_software www.hp.com/go/carepack www.register.hp.com
ENWW Customer support 315
316 Appendix A Service and support ENWW
B Product specifications
●
●
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions
●
ENWW 317
Physical specifications
Table B-1 Product dimensions and weights
Product model Height
M712n
M712dn
M712xh
Optional 500-sheet feeder
Optional 1x500-sheet feeder and stand
Optional 3x500-sheet feeder and stand
Optional 3,500-sheet high-capacity input feeder and stand
1
With toner installed
389 mm (15.3 in)
389 mm (15.3 in)
514 mm (20.2 in)
125 mm (4.9 in)
551 mm (21.7 in)
551 mm (21.7 in)
551 mm (21.7 in)
Depth
585 mm (23.0 in)
585 mm (23.0 in)
585 mm (23.0 in)
585 mm (23.0 in)
681 mm (26.8 in)
681 mm (26.8 in)
681 mm (26.8 in)
Width
568 mm (22.4 in)
568 mm (22.4 in)
568 mm (22.4 in)
568 mm (22.4 in)
745 mm (29.3 in)
745 mm (29.3 in)
745 mm (29.3 in)
Weight
49.4 kg (109 lb)
11.3 kg (25 lb)
22.7 kg (50 lb)
29.9 kg (66 lb)
38.6 kg (85 lb)
Table B-2 Product dimensions with all doors and trays fully opened
Product model Height Depth
M712n
M712dn
M712xh
389 mm (15.3 in)
389 mm (15.3 in)
514 mm (20.2 in)
998 mm (39.3 in)
998 mm (39.3 in)
998 mm (39.3 in)
Width
805 mm (31.7 in)
805 mm (31.7 in)
805 mm (31.7 in)
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions
See www.hp.com/go/lj700M712_regulatory-environmental for current information.
CAUTION:
Power requirements are based on the country/region where the product is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. This will damage the product and void the product warranty.
Environmental specifications
Table B-3 Operating-environment specifications
Environment Recommended
Temperature
Relative humidity
Altitude
17° to 25°C (62.6° to 77°F)
30% to 70% relative humidity (RH)
Not applicable
Allowed
15° to 30°C (59° to 86°F)
10% to 80% RH
0 to 3048 m (0 to 10,000 ft)
318 Appendix B Product specifications ENWW
C Regulatory information
●
●
Environmental product stewardship program
●
●
ENWW 319
FCC regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
NOTE:
Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class A limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.
320 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW
Environmental product stewardship program
Protecting the environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment.
Ozone production
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O
3
).
Power consumption
Power usage drops significantly while in Ready or Sleep mode, which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this product. Hewlett-Packard printing and imaging equipment marked with the ENERGY STAR
®
logo is qualified to the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency's ENERGY STAR specifications for imaging equipment. The following mark will appear on ENERGY STAR qualified imaging products:
Additional ENERGY STAR qualified imaging product model information is listed at: www.hp.com/go/energystar
Toner consumption
EconoMode uses less toner, which might extend the life of the toner cartridge. HP does not recommend the full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time, the toner supply might outlast the mechanical parts in the toner cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade and is no longer acceptable, consider replacing the toner cartridge.
Paper use
This product’s manual/automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and N-up printing (multiple pages printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources.
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.
ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 321
HP LaserJet print supplies
It’s easy to return and recycle your HP LaserJet toner cartridges after use—free of charge—with
HP Planet Partners. Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new
HP LaserJet toner cartridge and supplies package. You help reduce the toll on the environment further when you return multiple cartridges together rather than separately.
HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are environmentally sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, customer use and recycling. When you participate in the HP Planet Partners program, we ensure your HP LaserJet toner cartridges are recycled properly, processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons of waste from landfills. Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials, it will not be returned to you. Thank you for being environmentally responsible!
NOTE:
Use the return label to return original HP LaserJet toner cartridges only. Please do not use this label for HP inkjet cartridges, non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges or warranty returns. For information about recycling your HP inkjet cartridges please go to http://www.hp.com/ recycle .
Return and recycling instructions
United States and Puerto Rico
The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more
HP LaserJet toner cartridges after use. Please follow the applicable instructions below.
Multiple returns (more than one cartridge)
1.
Package each HP LaserJet toner cartridge in its original box and bag.
2.
Tape the boxes together using strapping or packaging tape. The package can weigh up to 31 kg
(70 lb).
3.
Use a single pre-paid shipping label.
OR
1.
Use your own suitable box, or request a free bulk collection box from www.hp.com/recycle or
1-800-340-2445 (holds up to 31 kg (70 lb) of HP LaserJet toner cartridges).
2.
Use a single pre-paid shipping label.
Single returns
1.
Package the HP LaserJet toner cartridge in its original bag and box.
2.
Place the shipping label on the front of the box.
Shipping
For US and Puerto Rico HP LaserJet toner cartridge recycling returns, use the pre-paid, pre-addressed shipping label contained in the box. To use the UPS label, give the package to the UPS driver during
322 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW
your next delivery or pick-up, or take it to an authorized UPS drop-off center. (Requested UPS Ground pickup will be charged normal pick-up rates) For the location of your local UPS drop-off center, call
1-800-PICKUPS or visit www.ups.com
.
If you are returning the package with the FedEx label, give the package to either the U.S. Postal Service carrier or FedEx driver during your next pick-up or delivery. (Requested FedEx Ground pickup will be charged normal pick-up rates). Or, you can drop off your packaged toner cartridge(s) at any U.S. Post
Office or any FedEx shipping center or store. For the location of your nearest U.S. Post Office, please call 1-800-ASK-USPS or visit www.usps.com
. For the location of your nearest FedEx shipping center/ store, please call 1-800-GOFEDEX or visit www.fedex.com
.
For more information, or to order additional labels or boxes for bulk returns, visit www.hp.com/recycle or call 1-800-340-2445. Information subject to change without notice.
Residents of Alaska and Hawaii
Do not use the UPS label. Call 1-800-340-2445 for information and instructions. The U.S. Postal
Service provides no-cost cartridge return transportation services under an arrangement with HP for
Alaska and Hawaii.
Non-U.S. returns
To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program, just follow the simple directions in the recycling guide (found inside the packaging of your new product supply item) or visit www.hp.com/recycle . Select your country/region for information on how to return your HP LaserJet printing supplies.
Paper
This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN12281:2002.
Material restrictions
This HP product does not contain added mercury.
This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end-of-life. The batteries contained in or supplied by Hewlett-Packard for this product include the following:
HP LaserJet Enterprise 700 M712
Type Carbon monofluoride lithium
Weight
Location
User-removable
0.8 g
On formatter board
No
ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 323
For recycling information, you can go to www.hp.com/recycle , or contact your local authorities or the
Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
.
Disposal of waste equipment by users
This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service, or go to: www.hp.com/recycle .
Electronic hardware recycling
HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware. For more information about recycling programs go to: www.hp.com/recycle .
Chemical substances
HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at: www.hp.com/go/reach .
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, toner) can be obtained by accessing the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/msds or www.hp.com/hpinfo/ community/environment/productinfo/safety .
For more information
To obtain information about these environmental topics:
●
Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products
●
HP’s commitment to the environment
324 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW
●
HP’s environmental management system
●
HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program
●
Material Safety Data Sheets
Visit www.hp.com/go/environment or www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment .
ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 325
Declaration of conformity
Manufacturer's Name:
Manufacturer's Address:
Declaration of Conformity
according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
DoC#: BOISB-1105-00-Rel.1.0
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares, that the product
Product Name:
Regulatory Model Numbers:
2)
Product Options:
Toner Cartridges:
HP LaserJet Enterprise 700 M712 series
BOISB-1105-00
All
CF214A, CF214X
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
SAFETY:
IEC 60950-1:2005 +A1 / EN60950-1: 2006 +A11:2009 +A1:2010 +A12:2011
EMC:
IEC 60825-1:2007 / EN 60825-1:2007 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)
IEC 62311:2007 / EN 62311:2008
GB4943-2001
CISPR22:2008/ EN55022:2010 - Class A
1), 3)
EN 61000-3-2:2006 +A1:2009 +A2:2009
EN 61000-3-3:2008
EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A
1)
/ ICES-003, Issue 4
GB9254-2008, GB17625.1-2003
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC, the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, and
the EuP Directive 2005/32/EC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly.
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
1.
The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2.
For regulatory purposes, these products are assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number(s).
3.
The product includes LAN (Local Area Network) options. When the interface cable is attached to LAN connectors, the product meets the requirements of EN55022 & CNS13438 Class A in which case the following applies: “Warning – This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.”
326 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW
Boise, Idaho USA
June 2012
For Regulatory Topics only, contact:
European Contact:
USA Contact:
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard Gmbh, Department HQ-
TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany (FAX:
+49-7031-14-3143) www.hp.com/go/certificates
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho
83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000)
ENWW Declaration of conformity 327
Safety statements
Laser safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance
Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
WARNING!
Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.
Canadian DOC regulations
Complies with Canadian EMC Class A requirements.
« Conforme à la classe A des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques. « CEM ». »
VCCI statement (Japan)
Power cord instructions
Make sure your power source is adequate for the product voltage rating. The voltage rating is on the product label. The product uses either 100-127 Vac or 220-240 Vac and 50/60 Hz.
Connect the power cord between the product and a grounded AC outlet.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the product, use only the power cord that is provided with the product.
Power cord statement (Japan)
328 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW
EMC statement (China)
EMC statement (Korea)
EMI statement (Taiwan)
Laser statement for Finland
Luokan 1 laserlaite
Klass 1 Laser Apparat
HP LaserJet Enterprise 700 M712n, M712dn, M712xh, laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (2007) mukaisesti.
VAROITUS !
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING !
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP LaserJet Enterprise 700 M712n, M712dn, M712xh - kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta
ENWW Safety statements 329
tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.
VARO !
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING !
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen.
Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m W
Luokan 3B laser.
330 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW
GS statement (Germany)
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert warden.
Das Gerät ist kein Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gemäß BildscharbV. Bei ungünstigen Lichtverhältnissen (z. B.
direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen auf dem Display und damit zu Einschränkungen der
Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen.
Substances Table (China)
Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (Turkey)
Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur
Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (Ukraine)
Обладнання відповідає вимогам Технічного регламенту щодо обмеження використання деяких небезпечних речовин в електричному та електронному обладнанні, затвердженого постановою
Кабінету Міністрів України від 3 грудня 2008 № 1057
ENWW Safety statements 331
332 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW
Index
Symbols/Numerics
3,500-sheet high-capacity tray
500-sheet tray
A
Accessories
3,500-sheet high-capacity input
accessories installed, information
Administration menu, control
B
Backup/Restore menu, control
black page, problem-solving 286
blank page
blank pages
blurred print, problem-solving
C
cables
Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control
cartridge
cartridges
checklist
circuit diagrams
clean the paper path
cleaning
cleaning stage, image-formation
clock
components
configuration pages
control panel
messages, numerical list 213 messages, types of 213
USB Firmware Upgrade menu
counts 293 page, reset 293 refurbish cycle 293
reset after replacing formatter
See also pages counts creased paper, problem-solving
curled paper, problem-solving
customer support
D
date
DC controller engine control system
DC controller PCA
ENWW
Index
333
density
developing stage 25 development block 25
diagnostics
component 145 control panel 145
Display Settings menu, control
dots, problem-solving 282, 287
drum image-formation operations
Duplexing
E
EIO cards
electronic hardware recycling
engine
engine control system operations
envelopes
environmental stewardship
error messages event log, listed numerically
numerical list 213 types of 213
messages, listed numerically
F
Finnish laser safety statement 329
firmware
fixing unit, image-formation
flowcharts
formatter
fuser
fuser unit, image-formation
G
General Settings menu, control
gray background, problem-
H
HCI
high-capacity tray
high-voltage power supply engine control system
high-voltage power supply PCA
HP Jetdirect print server
I
image defects, problem-solving
image formation
image repetition, problem-solving
installation
verify for optional accessories
INTR (initial rotation) period 3
J
jams
3,500-sheet high-capacity
Jetdirect print server
K
L
laser safety statements 328, 329
334 Index ENWW
laser scanner
laser-beam exposure stage, image
LEDs. See lights lenses, laser scanner operations
light print
lights
formatter 101 troubleshooting with 101
lines horizontal, problem-solving
lines vertical, problem-solving
lines, problem-solving 283, 287
log of events messages, listed numerically
loose toner, problem-solving 284
low-voltage power supply engine control system
low-voltage power-supply PCA 10
M
Manage Supplies menu, control
Manage Trays menu, control
Material Safety Data Sheet
media jams
memory
memory chip, toner cartridge
menus, control panel
messages event log, listed numerically
numerical list 213 types of 213
mirrors, laser scanner operations
misformed characters, problem-
N
Network Settings menu, control
networks
HP embedded Jetdirect
O
operations
pickup, feed, and delivery
output bin
P
pages
blank 290 not printing 290 printing slowly 290
from product refurbish date
See also counts paper
pickup-and-feed system
paper jams
3,500-sheet high-capacity
paper path
paper pickup problems
paper-path
password
photosensitive drum image-formation operations
pickup, feed, and delivery system
port configuration information
power
power supplies engine control system
ENWW Index 335
power supply
primary charging operations 24
Print Options menu, control panel
print quality
image defects 281 light print 281
misformed characters 285 repeating defects 285
white horizontal lines 286 white lines vertical 286
Print Quality menu options 278
Print Settings menu, control panel
printing
problem-solving
image defects 281 light print 281
lines horizontal 283, 286 lines vertical 286
tire tracks 287 white spots 287
R
HP printing supplies returns and
repeating defects, problem-
Reports menu, control panel 178
rollers image-formation operations
S
security settings information 176
sensor tests manual tray 4 paper size sensors (SW2
sensor tests manual tray/bin tray 4 door opening/closing
door sensor (SW1) 136 tray 4 feed sensor (X) 136 tray 4 paper sensor (SR3) 136
tray 4 paper surface sensor
tray 5 door opening/closing
sensor (SW1) 137 tray 5 feed sensor (SR81) 137
tray 5 paper sensor (SR83)
tray 5 paper size sensors
tray 5 paper surface sensor
tray 6 door opening/closing
sensor (SW1) 137 tray 6 feed sensor (SR91) 137
tray 6 paper sensor (SR93)
tray 6 paper size sensors
tray 6 paper surface sensor
sensor tests, manual
Tray 2 paper surface sensor
Tray 4 paper surface sensor
sensors
pickup-and-feed system
separation stage
Service ID
convert to date 293 restore 293
Service menu, control panel 212
settings
336 Index ENWW
smeared toner, problem-solving
software software license agreement
solving
direct-connect problems 291 network problems 291
specifications
electrical and acoustic 318 physical 318
287 spots, problem-solving 282, 287
status
supplies
support
T
technical support tests
paper path 106 paper-path sensors 106
text, problem-solving
theory of operations
pickup, feed, and delivery
tire tracks, problem-solving 287
toner image-formation operations
output quality, problem-
toner cartridge
toner cartridges
transfer roller image-formation operations
Tray 1
tray 1 pickup-and-feed system
Tray 2
tray 2 pickup-and-feed system
Tray 3
tray selection - use requested tray
trays pickup-and-feed system
control panel messages,
event log messages, numerical
pages not printing 290 pages printing slowly 290
reports and tools 101 status page 101
Troubleshooting menu, control
U
upgrades, downloading product
USB Firmware Upgrade menu,
USB port
V
version, hardware firmware 176
W
warranty
wavy paper, problem-solving 286
Web sites
ENWW Index 337
Material Safety Data Sheet
white horizontal lines or spots,
white vertical lines or spots,
wrinkled paper, problem-solving
338 Index ENWW
© 2013 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com
*CF235-90963*
*CF235-90963*
CF235-90963
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project